Ricoh D104 Field Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. D104
  6. Field service manual

Ricoh D104 Field Service Manual

Di-c1.5
Hide thumbs Also See for D104:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
Model DI-C1.5
Machine Code: D104/D106
Field Service Manual
17 December, 2010

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh D104

Summary of Contents for Ricoh D104

  • Page 1 Model DI-C1.5 Machine Code: D104/D106 Field Service Manual 17 December, 2010...

  • Page 3: Important Safety Notices

    Important Safety Notices Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer Customer Engineer Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine. Reference Material for Maintenance •...

  • Page 4: During Maintenance

    Power • Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source. •...

  • Page 5: Safety Devices

    • Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces. Safety Devices • Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety devices immediately. • Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal injury.

  • Page 6: After Installation, Servicing

    Ozone Filters • Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in the service manual). • An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.

  • Page 7: Special Safety Instructions For Toner

    • Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal. • Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.) in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
  • Page 8 • If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention. • If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water. •...

  • Page 9: Safety Instructions For This Machine

    Safety Instructions for this Machine Prevention of Physical Injury 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged. 2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible. 3.

  • Page 10: Laser Safety

    2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box.

  • Page 11: Symbols, Abbreviations And Trademarks

    Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Trademarks ® ® ®...

  • Page 12: Table Of Contents

    Safety Instructions for this Machine.......................7 Laser Safety..............................8 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks......................9 Trademarks..............................9 1. Product Information Specifications..............................21 Machine Configuration............................22 Machine D104/D106..........................22 Overview................................25 Mechanical Component Layout.........................25 Paper Path..............................27 Drive Layout..............................29 Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products..............30 2. Installation Installation Requirements..........................31 Environment..............................31...
  • Page 13 Moving the Machine...........................54 Transporting the Machine...........................54 Paper Feed Unit (D331)..........................56 Accessory Check............................56 Installation Procedure..........................56 Paper Feed Unit (D425)..........................59 Component Check............................59 Installation Procedure..........................59 Caster Table (D488)............................62 Component Check............................62 Installation Procedure..........................62 ARDF (D366)..............................65 Component Check............................65 Installation Procedure..........................65 Platen Cover Installation (G329)........................69 Side Tray (D427).............................70 Component Check............................70 Installation Procedure..........................71 1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)............................74...
  • Page 14 Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)....................103 Component Check............................103 Installation Procedure..........................104 USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556).........................106 Accessory Check............................106 Installation Procedure..........................106 Testing the SD Card/USB Slot.........................110 Mechanical Counter (NA Only)........................112 Installation Procedure..........................112 Key Counter Bracket............................114 Installation Procedure..........................114 Key Counter Interface Unit..........................116 Installation Procedure..........................116 Anti-Condensation Heater..........................118 Installation Procedure..........................118 Tray Heater..............................122...
  • Page 15 After Installing the New PM parts......................151 Preparation before Operation Check......................151 Operation Check............................151 4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand..............................153 Special Tools..............................154 Image Adjustment............................155 Scanning..............................155 ARDF................................156 Registration..............................158 Erase Margin Adjustment..........................159 Color Registration............................160 Printer Gamma Correction........................161 Exterior Covers...............................165 PCDU Toner Collection Bottle........................165 Front Door..............................165 ITB Cleaning Unit Cover...........................166 Left Cover..............................167 Rear Cover..............................168...
  • Page 16 Scanner Unit..............................176 Exposure Glass............................176 Original Length Sensors..........................178 Exposure Lamp............................179 Scanner Motor............................182 Sensor Board Unit (SBU)..........................183 Exposure Lamp Stabilizer.........................184 Scanner HP Sensor............................184 Platen Cover Sensor..........................185 Front Scanner Wire...........................185 Rear Scanner Wire............................191 Laser Optics..............................194 Caution Decal Location..........................194 Laser Unit..............................194 Polygon Mirror Motor..........................199 Image Creation..............................201 PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)...................201 Drum Unit and Development Unit......................202...
  • Page 17 PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit.......................225 Paper Transfer Unit Full-Open........................226 ID Sensor Board............................227 PTR Contact Motor............................229 PTR Contact Sensor...........................231 Temperature and Humidity Sensor......................232 Drive Unit................................233 Gear Unit..............................233 Registration Motor.............................235 Paper Feed Motor: T1..........................236 Paper Feed Motor: T2..........................237 Drum Motor: CMY............................237 Development Motor: CMY........................238 Drum/Development Motor: K........................238 Development Clutch: K..........................239 Fusing/Paper Exit Motor..........................239...
  • Page 18 Friction Pad..............................263 Paper Size Switch............................264 Paper End Sensor............................265 Registration Sensor............................266 Vertical Transport Sensor .........................268 Paper Exit................................272 Junction Gate Solenoid Fan........................272 Paper Exit Unit............................272 Fusing Exit Sensor............................274 Paper Exit Sensor............................275 Inverter Sensor............................276 Inverter Motor............................277 Fusing Front Fan............................278 Duplex Unit..............................280 Duplex Unit..............................280 Duplex Entrance Sensor..........................281 Duplex Exit Sensor............................283 Duplex Entrance Motor..........................284...
  • Page 19 Controller Box Fan............................298 Fusing Rear Fan............................299 DRB................................300 SDVDB................................300 PSU................................301 HVPS: TTS Board............................302 HVPS: CB Board............................302 Controller Board............................303 NVRAM Replacement Procedure......................307 5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode..........................311 SP Tables..............................311 Types of SP Modes............................311 Remarks..............................315 Main SP Tables-1............................317 SP1-XXX (Feed)............................317 Main SP Tables-2............................338 SP2-XXX (Drum)............................338 Main SP Tables-3............................365 SP3-XXX (Process).............................365...
  • Page 20 Firmware Update............................530 Type of Firmware............................530 Before You Begin............................531 Updating Firmware ..........................532 Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel..................534 Handling Firmware Update Errors......................535 Java VM Updating Procedure........................536 App2Me Updating Procedure.........................537 Brower Unit Updating Procedure......................538 Installing Another Language.........................540 Reboot/System Setting Reset........................543 Software Reset............................543 System Settings and Copy Setting Reset....................543 Controller Self-Diagnostics...........................545 Overview..............................545...
  • Page 21 Overview..............................560 Procedure..............................560 6. Troubleshooting SC Tables...............................565 Service Call Conditions..........................565 SC1xx: Scanning............................568 SC 2xx: Exposure............................572 SC3xx: Image Processing – 1........................577 SC4xx: Image Processing - 2........................582 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing........................586 SC6xx: Device Communication.......................599 SC7xx: Peripherals............................608 SC8xx: Overall System..........................614 SC9xx: Miscellaneous..........................632 Process Control Error Conditions........................637 Developer Initialization Result........................637 Process Control Self-Check Result......................638 Line Position Adjustment Result.........................640...
  • Page 22 Jam Codes and Display Codes........................694 Electrical Component Defects........................699 Sensors ..............................699 Blown Fuse Conditions..........................703 Scanner Test Mode............................705 SBU Test Mode............................705 IPU Test Mode............................705 7. Energy Saving Energy Save..............................707 Energy Saver Modes..........................707 Energy Save Effectiveness........................708 Paper Save..............................710 Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function....................710 INDEX ................................715...

  • Page 23: Product Information

    1. Product Information Specifications See "Appendices" for the following information: • General Specifications • Supported Paper Sizes • Software Accessories • Optional Equipment...

  • Page 24: Machine Configuration

    1. Product Information Machine Configuration Machine D104/D106 Machine Call Item Remarks Code D104/ Mainframe D104: C1.5a, D106: C1.5c D106 Platen cover G329 One from the two; [3] is standard. ARDF D366 Side tray D427 1-bin tray D426 [12] One of the following 4 choices: [10] only, [11] only, [12]...

  • Page 25: 1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)

    Machine Configuration Machine Call Item Remarks Code Punch unit: 2/3 D390-17 Requires [10]. holes Punch unit: 2 holes D390-27 Requires [10]. Punch unit: 4 holes D390-31 Requires [10]. Two-tray paper D331 One from [6], [7], and [8]; feed unit The one-tray PFU [6] requires [8]. One-tray paper D425 If neither [6] nor [7] is installed, install [8] if required by the...
  • Page 26 1. Product Information Optional Counter Interface Unit B870 Type A Key Counter Bracket A674 Postscript3 Unit Type C2551 D556-4, -5, -6 D556-12, -13, You can only install one of these in SD slot 1 at IPDS Unit Type C2551 a time. Camera Direct Print Card Type I D546 Browser Unit Type E...

  • Page 27: Overview

    Overview Overview Mechanical Component Layout...
  • Page 28 1. Product Information 1. Scanner HP sensor 16. Feed roller: T1 2. 2nd carriage 17. Vertical transport roller 2 3. 1st carriage 18. Feed roller: T1 4. Original length sensor 19. Vertical transport roller 3 5. Lens 20. Tray 2 6.

  • Page 29: Paper Path

    Overview Paper Path With options 6. By-pass tray path 1. DF path 7. Vertical transport path: Tray 2 2. Exit path: Straight feed out 8. Vertical transport path: Tray 3 (option) 3. Exit path: Side tray 9. Vertical transport path: Tray 4 (option) 4.
  • Page 30 1. Product Information Without options 1. DF path 5. By-pass tray path 2. Inverter path 6. Vertical transport path: Tray 2 3. Duplex path 7. Exit path 4. Vertical transport path: T1...

  • Page 31: Drive Layout

    Overview Drive Layout 1. Scanner motor 10. Paper feed motor: T1 2. Toner supply motors 11. By-pass motor 3. ITB contact motor 12. Registration motor 4. Used toner collection motor 13. Duplex exit motor 5. Drum motor: CMY 14. PTR contact motor 6.

  • Page 32: Guidance For Those Who Are Familiar With Predecessor Products

    Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products Machine D104/D106 is a successor model to Machine D038/D041. If you have experience with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual. Different Points from Predecessor Products...

  • Page 33: Installation

    2. Installation Installation Requirements Environment 1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) 2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH 3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) 4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more 5.

  • Page 34: Machine Level

    2. Installation • The toner bottle must be kept at a temperature of 35°C (95°F) or less. Be careful not to leave the toner bottle in a hot place when transporting or storing it. Machine Level Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") Machine Space Requirements •...

  • Page 35: Power Requirements

    Installation Requirements Power Requirements • Insert the plug firmly in the outlet. • Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord. • Ground the machine. 1. Input voltage level: • 120 V to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A •...

  • Page 36: Optional Unit Combinations

    2. Installation Optional Unit Combinations Machine Options Options Remarks 2-tray paper feed unit One from No.1 or No.2 (No. 2 1-tray paper feed unit requires No. 3) Caster table This option can be installed only in Envelop Feeder the tray 1 of the mainframe. Platen cover One from No.5 or No.6 ARDF (Standard)

  • Page 37: Controller Options

    Optional Unit Combinations Controller Options Options Remarks IEEE 802.11a/g IEEE 1284 Bluetooth One from six items (I/F Slot) File Format Converter Gigabit Ethernet PostScript 3 One of these (SD card slot 1) PictBridge SD card slot 2 (during Browser Unit installation only)

  • Page 38: Copier Installation

    2. Installation Copier Installation Power Sockets for Peripherals CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals. Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets. [1] ARDF: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V [2] Finisher: Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max. DC24V Installation Flow Chart This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation.

  • Page 39: Accessory Check

    Copier Installation *1: The shift tray should be installed first if you want to install the shift tray with the 1-bin tray at the same time. Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of these accessories. Description Q’ty Destination Stamp -17, -27 EU Safety Sheet WEEE...
  • Page 40 2. Installation Description Q’ty Destination Certification --17, -19, -21, -27, -28, -29 Warranty Sheet (Chinese) Operating Instruction – About this machine -17, -29, -21, Operating Instruction – Troubleshooting -27, -29, -21, Operating Instruction – Quick Reference Copy Guide Operating Instruction – Quick Reference Printer Guide -17, -27, -29, -21, -19 10.

  • Page 41: Installation Procedure

    Copier Installation Description Q’ty Destination -17, -27, -29, 27. Handle Cover -21, -19 -17, -27, -29, 28. Decal - Paper Size -21, -19 -27, -29, -21, 29. Sheet: Data: Display: Plain Installation Procedure • Remove the tapes from the development units before you turn the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tapes.
  • Page 42 2. Installation • Do not hold the right bottom frame [C] of the machine when lifting or moving the machine. If you do so, the right bottom frame [C] of the machine may be bent. Tapes and Retainers 1. Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine.
  • Page 43 Copier Installation 2. Open the DF left cover [A], and then remove all the tapes and retainer on the ADF if the ADF has been installed. 3. Open the ADF unit, and then remove all the tapes and plastic package. •...
  • Page 44 2. Installation 5. Remove the scanner unit stay [A]. 6. Keep the scanner unit stay in the cutout [B] in the inner tray. • For the EU models, the scanner unit stay cannot be inserted in the cutout on the inner tray. You must bring this stay back to your depot.
  • Page 45 Copier Installation 8. Open the duplex unit [A]. 9. Remove the sheet of paper [B] from the fusing unit. 10. Open the paper transfer unit [A]. 11. Remove the front and rear stoppers [B] with a red tag. 12. Close the duplex unit.
  • Page 46 2. Installation 13. Attach the handle cover [A] to the front side of the duplex unit. Developer and Toner Bottles 1. Open the front door [A], and then remove the PCDU toner collection bottle [B]. 2. Remove the ITB lock lever [A] from the PCDU toner collection bottle. •...
  • Page 47 Copier Installation 3. Remove four tapes [A] from the four development units. 4. Remove the all tapes [A] from the toner hopper units. • The toner hopper cover [B] can be removed with tape [C]. • Make sure that the all toner hopper covers are removed, when removing all tapes.
  • Page 48 2. Installation 5. Check if the toner hopper shutter [A] is fully closed. • If the toner hopper shutter is not fully closed and the inlet [B] of the toner hopper unit is visible, the toner bottle cannot be installed properly. 6.
  • Page 49 Copier Installation 9. Take out the toner bottle package [A] from the toner bottle box [B]. 10. Unpack the toner bottle package, and then remove the tape [C]. 11. Shake each toner bottle five or six times. 12. Slide the toner bottles [A] in toner bottle cartridges. •...
  • Page 50 2. Installation 13. Push the toner bottle, and then turn each one to the right (clockwise). 14. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] ( x 1). 15. Insert the SD Card (Java VM) provided in the accessories into SD slot 2 [B]. 16.
  • Page 51 Copier Installation Emblem and Decals 1. Attach the correct emblem [A] and the cover [B] to the front door [C] of the machine, if the emblem is not attached. • If you want to change the emblem that has been already attached, remove the panel with an object (not a sharp object) as shown [D], and then install the correct emblem.
  • Page 52 2. Installation • 4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover. • 5) Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC. 6. Check that the sample image has been copied normally. 7. Open the front cover. 8.
  • Page 53 Copier Installation SP No. Function Default 5812-002 programs the service station fax number. SP5-812-001 The number is printed on the counter list when the through 004 meter charge mode is selected. This lets the user fax the counter data to the service station. Settings for @Remote Service •...
  • Page 54 2. Installation Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround Communication error (proxy enabled) Check the network condition. Communication error (proxy disabled) Check the network condition. Proxy error (Illegal user name or Check Proxy user name and password. password) Communication error Check the network condition. Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes"...
  • Page 55 Copier Installation Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround Obtain a Request Number Inquiry, registration attempted -12002 before attempting the Inquiry or without acquiring Request No. Registration. -12003 Attempted registration without Perform Confirmation before execution of a confirmation and no attempting the Registration. previous registration.

  • Page 56: Moving The Machine

    2. Installation Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -2385 Other error -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service Two registrations for the same Check the registration condition -2391 mainframe of the mainframe Error Caused by -2392 Parameter error Response from...
  • Page 57 Copier Installation • Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors. • Shrink-wrap the machine tightly. • After you move the machine, Make sure you do the "Auto Color Registration" as follows. This optimizes color registration. • Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3). •...

  • Page 58: Paper Feed Unit (D331)

    2. Installation Paper Feed Unit (D331) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Paper Feed Unit Screw - M4 x 10 Securing Bracket Installation Procedure • Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. •...
  • Page 59 Paper Feed Unit (D331) 1. Remove the strips of tape. 2. Set the copier [A] on the paper tray unit [B]. • When installing the copier, be careful not to pinch the cable [C]. 3. Remove the connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1). 4.
  • Page 60 2. Installation 7. Remove the 1st and 2nd paper trays [A] and secure the paper tray unit with two screws (M4 x 10) [B]. 8. Reinstall all the paper trays. 9. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal and paper size decal to each handle of the trays. •...

  • Page 61: Paper Feed Unit (D425)

    Paper Feed Unit (D425) Paper Feed Unit (D425) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Paper Feed Unit Securing bracket Screw (M4 x 10) Installation Procedure • Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure.
  • Page 62 2. Installation 1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit. 2. Remove the paper tray and remove all tapes and padding. 3. Put the paper tray unit on the caster table (D448). • For details about the installation of the caster table, see the “Caster Table (D488)” installation procedure.
  • Page 63 Paper Feed Unit (D425) 6. Remove the rear connector cover [A] of the main machine (rivet screw x 1). 7. Connect the harness [B] to the main machine. 8. Reinstall the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1). 9. Remove tray 1 and 2 of the machine. 10.

  • Page 64: Caster Table (D488)

    2. Installation Caster Table (D488) Component Check Description Q’ty Caster Table Step Screw Installation Procedure 1. Put the caster table on a flat place. 2. Install the two pins in the screw holes.
  • Page 65 Caster Table (D488) • Use the screw holes [A] and [C] if the mainframe is directly installed on the caster table. • Use the screw holes [B] and [C] if the one-tray paper feed unit (D425) is installed on the caster table.
  • Page 66 2. Installation 7. Reinstall the tray in the mainframe or one-tray paper feed unit. 8. Adjust the five leveling adjustors of the caster table.

  • Page 67: Ardf (D366)

    ARDF (D366) ARDF (D366) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty ARDF Stamp Cartridge Knob Screw Stud Screw Attention Decal – Top Cover Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1.
  • Page 68 2. Installation 2. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine. 3. Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws. 4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine. 5.
  • Page 69 ARDF (D366) 6. Install the stamp cartridge [A] in the ARDF. 7. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place it on the exposure glass. 8. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [B] on the exposure glass. 9.
  • Page 70 2. Installation 11. Attach the decal [A] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language that you want. 12. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF operation. 13. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew are correct.

  • Page 71: Platen Cover Installation (G329)

    Platen Cover Installation (G329) Platen Cover Installation (G329) 1. Install the stud screws [A] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown. 2. Position the platen cover bracket [B] on the heads of the stud screws, and slide the platen cover [C] to the left.

  • Page 72: Side Tray (D427)

    2. Installation Side Tray (D427) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Side Tray Paper Exit Unit Side Tray Decal: Push Decal: Door Push Screw: M3x8 Tray Stopper...

  • Page 73: Installation Procedure

    Side Tray (D427) Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. Remove all tapes on the side tray. 2. Open the duplex unit [A]. 3. Remove the right upper cover [B] ( x 2). 4.
  • Page 74 2. Installation 6. Install the side tray [A]. 7. Lift the side tray, and then install the tray stopper [B] ( x 1: M3x8). 8. Attach the ‘Push door’ decal [A] to the top front edge of the duplex unit cover. 9.
  • Page 75 Side Tray (D427) 10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 11. Check the side tray operation.

  • Page 76: 1-Bin Tray Unit (D426)

    2. Installation 1-Bin Tray Unit (D426) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Tray 1-Bin Tray Unit Screw: Blue (M3 x 6) Screw (M3 x 8) Tray Support Bar Installation Procedure •...
  • Page 77 1-Bin Tray Unit (D426) • If both the shift tray unit and the 1-bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the same time, install the shift tray unit first. Installing the shift tray unit after the 1-bin tray unit may be difficult. 1.
  • Page 78 2. Installation 6. Remove the connector cover [A] with a small flat screwdriver. 7. Remove the left frame cover [B] ( x 1). 8. Install the 1-bin tray unit [A] ( x 1: M3x6 blue, x 1). 9. Install the tray [A] (with the tray support bar) in the machine.
  • Page 79 1-Bin Tray Unit (D426) 10. Attach the tray support cover [B] ( x 2: M3x8 in the accessories and one screw removed in step 11. Reassemble the machine. 12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine, and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.

  • Page 80: Shift Tray Unit (D428)

    2. Installation Shift Tray Unit (D428) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Shift Tray Unit Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. • If both the shift tray unit and the 1-bin tray unit are installed in the mainframe at the same time, install the shift tray unit first.
  • Page 81 Shift Tray Unit (D428) 2. Remove the inverter tray [A] (hook). 3. Remove the output tray [B] ( x 2). 4. Put the shift tray [A] in the machine, and then connect the harness to the connector [B] on the inner rear frame.
  • Page 82 2. Installation 5. Install the shift tray [A] fully in the machine ( x 2). 6. Reinstall the inverter tray. 7. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 8. Check the shift tray unit operation.

  • Page 83: Internal Finisher (D429)

    Internal Finisher (D429) Internal Finisher (D429) This procedure explains how to install the internal finisher, without installing the punch unit at the same time. Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Internal Finisher Inverter Unit Inner Bottom Plate...

  • Page 84: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Installation Procedure • Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher 1. Remove all tapes from the internal finisher. 2. Remove the inverter tray [A]. 3. Open the front door [B]. 4.
  • Page 85 Internal Finisher (D429) 7. Open the duplex unit [A], and then remove the front right cover [B] ( x 1). 8. Remove the following: • Inner tray [A] ( x 2) • Left frame rear cover [B] ( x 2) •...
  • Page 86 2. Installation 9. Install the inner bottom plate [A] ( x 6). 10. Attach the left cover [A] ( x 2: M3x6, one screw removed in step 8). Internal Finisher Installation • If the punch unit (D390) is to be installed with this finisher (D429) at the same time, skip this procedure below, and then refer to the installation procedure of "Punch Unit (D390)".
  • Page 87 Internal Finisher (D429) 1. Insert the inverter unit [A] in the machine. 2. Insert two joint pins [A] into the two holes in the inner rear bracket. 3. Fully attach the front side [B] of the inverter unit to the paper exit unit of the mainframe after inserting the two joint pins ( x 1: M3x6).
  • Page 88 2. Installation 4. Install the guide rail [A] ( x 2: M3x6). 5. Attach the inverter cover [A] ( x 3: M3x10). 6. Install the internal finisher [A] from the left side of the machine.
  • Page 89 Internal Finisher (D429) 7. Insert the rear rail pins [A] into the frame of the machine ( x 1: M3x6). 8. Push the internal finisher [A] and connect the cable [B] to the power socket of the machine. 9. Reassemble the machine. 10.

  • Page 90: Punch Unit (D390)

    2. Installation Punch Unit (D390) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Punch Unit Output Tray Lower Cover Drawer Connector Bracket Left Frame Cover Punch Cover...

  • Page 91: Installation Procedure

    Punch Unit (D390) Installation Procedure If the internal finisher has not already been installed, skip the "Removing the Internal Finisher" section, and go to the "Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher" section. Also do "Preparing before Installing the Internal Finisher" in the "Internal Finisher (D429)" section. If the internal finisher has already been installed, you must remove it first.
  • Page 92 2. Installation 4. Remove the internal finisher [A] ( x 1: M3x6). 5. Remove the inverter cover [A] ( x 3: M3x10). 6. Remove the guide rail [A] ( x 2: M3x6).
  • Page 93 Punch Unit (D390) 7. Pull the inverter unit [A] toward the front side ( x 1: M3x6). 8. Remove the inverter unit [A] from the machine. Preparing the Punch Unit before Installing the Internal Finisher...
  • Page 94 2. Installation 1. Remove the inverter right bracket [A] from the inverter unit ( x 4). 2. To remove screw [B], open guide plate [C]. 3. Remove the positioning pin bracket [A] from the inverter right bracket ( x 2). 4.
  • Page 95 Punch Unit (D390) 5. Slide the inverter small guide [A] to the front side (arrow direction), and then remove it ( x 1). 6. Remove all the tapes on the punch unit. • If all the tapes are not removed, SC763 may occur. 7.
  • Page 96 2. Installation Installing the Punch and Inverter Unit 1. Install the punch and inverter unit [A] in the mainframe. 2. Insert the two joint pins [A] (this picture does not show the two joint pins) into the two holes in the inner rear bracket.
  • Page 97 Punch Unit (D390) 4. Remove the stopper [A] from the guide rail, and then attach with the screw holes [B] (these screw holes must be used when the internal finisher is installed with the punch unit). 5. Install the guide rail [A] on the front edge of the inner bottom plate ( x 2).
  • Page 98 2. Installation Preparing the Internal Finisher 1. Remove the left rear cover [A] and the rear cover [B] of the internal finisher ( x 2 each). 2. Attach the drawer connector [A] to the rear bracket of the finisher. 3. Connect the harnesses [B] to the connectors [C] on the main board. •...
  • Page 99 Punch Unit (D390) Installing the Internal Finisher 1. Install the internal finisher [A] in the mainframe ( x 1). 2. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2). 3. Attach the bracket [A] ( x 2); this bracket is for the internal finisher when used with the punch unit.
  • Page 100 2. Installation 4. Remove the output tray lower cover [A]; this cover is for the internal finisher without the punch unit x 3). 5. Attach the output tray lower cover [A]; this cover is for the internal finisher when used with the punch unit ( x 3).
  • Page 101 Punch Unit (D390) Note The two projections [A] on the output tray lower cover (this plate is actually attached to the output tray lower cover) must be inserted along the two guide rails [B] inside the output tray unit. Push the slide plate [A] to check if the output tray lower cover is correctly installed. The left side picture shows the correct result and the right side picture shows the incorrect result.
  • Page 102 2. Installation 7. Push the internal finisher in the mainframe. 8. Connect the I/F cable [B] of the finisher to the inlet of the mainframe.

  • Page 103: Envelope Feeder Ef3010 (D559)

    Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559) Envelope Feeder EF3010 (D559) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Envelope Feeder Installation Procedure • This tray can be only installed in tray 1 of the copier. Do not install this tray in trays other than tray 1. Otherwise, paper jam or other paper problem may occur.
  • Page 104 2. Installation 2. Pull paper tray 1 [A] part of the way out. 3. Remove two screws from both tray guides. 4. Pull out paper tray 1 [A]. 5. Install the envelope feeder [A] into tray 1 of the main machine. 6.

  • Page 105: Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547)

    Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547) Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547) Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 14* Screw: M3 x 25 Tapping Screw: M3 x 10 Upper Tray Lower Tray...

  • Page 106: Installation Procedure

    2. Installation Installation Procedure 1. Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover. 2. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover ( [C] x 2: M3x10, [D] x 1: M3x25). • For this model, use the screw holes marked "3" on the table bracket. 3.
  • Page 107 Card Reader Bracket Type C5501 (D547) • The smart card reader must be placed on this card reader tray. If not, some antenna or transmitter in the main machine may be interrupted.

  • Page 108: Usb2.0/Sd Slot Type G (D556)

    2. Installation USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556) Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty USB2.0/SD Slot Ground Plate USB Cable Screw: M3 x 6 blue Screw: M3 x 8 Decal Clamp PDF Direct Card* *1: If the PostScript 3 option is used in this machine, this card is not necessary.
  • Page 109 USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556) 3. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 8). 4. Remove the scanner left cover [A] ( x 2). 5. Remove the left frame cover [B] ( x 2). 6. Remove the part [A] on the scanner left cover.
  • Page 110 2. Installation 7. Make four holes in the scanner left cover with a screwdriver as shown [A]. • Smooth the four holes in the scanner left cover as shown [B]. 8. Route the USB cable [A] through the gaps in the left scanner cover. 9.
  • Page 111 USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556) 10. Attach the scanner left cover [A] to the mainframe ( x 2). 11. Connect the USB cable [B] to USB-A (this is the USB slot closest to the front side of the machine) as shown above.

  • Page 112: Testing The Sd Card/Usb Slot

    2. Installation 17. Enter the System SP mode. 18. Move security applications (HDD Encryption unit and Data Overwrite Security Unit) from the SD card in SD slot 2 to the SD card in SD slot 1 with SP5-873-001 "Move Exec" ( p.132 "SD Card Appli Move").
  • Page 113 USB2.0/SD Slot Type G (D556) 7. Press [OK]. 8. Press the [Start] key. When writing is complete, a confirmation message appears. 9. Press [Exit]. 10. Remove the memory device from the media slot. • Do not remove the memory device while writing is in process.

  • Page 114: Mechanical Counter (Na Only)

    2. Installation Mechanical Counter (NA Only) • This counter is supplied as a spare part. Installation Procedure 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. Controller box cover ( p.293) 4. Remove the cutout [A] in the rear lower cover with nippers. 5.
  • Page 115 Mechanical Counter (NA Only) 6. Attach the mechanical counter bracket [A] to the frame ( x 2). 7. Connect the mechanical counter harness [C] to the mechanical counter [D] and the BCU (CN218) [E], and route the harness as shown above ( x 5) 8.

  • Page 116: Key Counter Bracket

    2. Installation Key Counter Bracket After the key counter bracket is installed in the mainframe, the following options cannot be used at the same time. • Internal Finisher Type C2550 (D429) • Handset (B433) Installation Procedure 1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key counter holder [C].
  • Page 117 Key Counter Bracket 5. Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover. 6. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket, and attach the key counter to the scanner left cover. 7. Connect the key counter cable [A] to the connector [B]. 8.

  • Page 118: Key Counter Interface Unit

    2. Installation Key Counter Interface Unit Installation Procedure 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Cut off the part [A] of the rear cover. 3. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 4. Controller box cover ( p.293) 5. Attach the clamp [A] to the DRB bracket. 6.
  • Page 119 Key Counter Interface Unit 7. Connect and route the key counter cable [A] to the connector on the key counter interface board as shown above (ground screw x 1, x 6). 8. Connect and route the harness [B] to the connector on the key counter interface board and connector CN216 [C] on the BCU ( x 5) 9.

  • Page 120: Anti-Condensation Heater

    2. Installation Anti-Condensation Heater Installation Procedure • This heater is supplied as a spare part. 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Open the ARDF or platen cover. 3. Glass cover [A] (stepped screw x 4) 4. Disconnect the DF I/F cable [A]. 5.
  • Page 121 Anti-Condensation Heater 6. ARDF exposure glass [A] • Position the white marker [B] at the rear-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass. 7. Rear scale [A] (stepped screw x 3)
  • Page 122 2. Installation 8. Exposure glass [A] with left scale. • Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure glass. 9. Move the scanner carriage fully across to the right side by rotating the scanner motor [A] at the rear of the machine.
  • Page 123 Anti-Condensation Heater 14. Attach a clamp as shown above. 15. Connect the harness [A] of the heater to the connector [B] in the frame of the machine. 16. Reassemble the machine.

  • Page 124: Tray Heater

    2. Installation Tray Heater Installation Procedure Mainframe • This heater is supplied as a spare part. 1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine. 2. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1). 3. Connect the connector [B] of the heater to the connector of the main machine. 4.
  • Page 125 Tray Heater Tray Heater for D425 (Option) 1. Remove the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1) of the mainframe. 2. Disconnect the harness [B]. 3. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe ( x 5). 4. Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit.
  • Page 126 2. Installation 5. Remove the securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [B] of the paper feed unit x 2). 6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B]. 7. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1) 8.
  • Page 127 Tray Heater 9. Insert the heater harness [A] into the tube [B], and push the tube against the rear frame of the paper feed unit as shown above. • Make sure that the tube is in contact with the rear frame [C]. 10.
  • Page 128 2. Installation 12. Remove the connector cap [A] from the tray heater harness. 13. Connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness [C] of the mainframe. • Do not connect the relay harness [B] to the tray heater harness of the mainframe before installing the securing bracket [D].
  • Page 129 Tray Heater Tray Heater for D331 (Option) 1. Remove the rear connector cover [A] (rivet screw x 1) of the mainframe. 2. Disconnect the harness [B]. 3. Remove the rear lower cover [A] of the mainframe ( x 5). 4. Pull out all the tray cassettes of the paper feed unit.
  • Page 130 2. Installation 5. Remove the securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each), and then rear cover [B] of the paper feed unit ( x 2). 6. Pass the connector [A] through the opening [B]. 7. Install the tray heater [C] ( x 1).
  • Page 131 Tray Heater 9. Remove the harness guide [A] ( x 1), and move it in the blue arrow direction as shown above. 10. Insert the heater harness [A] into the tube [B], and push the tube against the rear frame of the paper feed unit as shown above.
  • Page 132 2. Installation • Make sure that the edge of the tube [A] is placed as shown above. • The clamp [B] is not used. 12. Reinstall the harness guide. 13. Reattach the rear cover of the paper feed unit ( x 2) and securing brackets ( x 1 each).

  • Page 133: Controller Options

    Controller Options Controller Options Overview This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slot applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). I/F Card Slots •...

  • Page 134: Sd Card Appli Move

    2. Installation USB Slots • Left-side USB slot [C]: Used for connecting a digital camera (only works if PictBridge is installed). • Right-side USB slot [D]: Used when installing the optional USB2.0/SD card slot SD Card Appli Move • The PostScript3 application and fonts cannot be moved to another SD card. However, other applications can be moved onto the PostScript3 SD card.

  • Page 135: Move Exec

    Controller Options SD Card Storage: • 1. Hold down the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it in the arrow direction. • 2. Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 4), and then keep the SD card in the place [C] after you copy the application program from one card to another card.

  • Page 136: Postscript 3

    2. Installation 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. Undo Exec "Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
  • Page 137 Controller Options • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). 2. Remove the Security Card [B] from the SD slot 1 and VM card [C] from the SD slot 2. 3.

  • Page 138: File Format Converter

    2. Installation 10. Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door. 11. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). File Format Converter • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. 1.

  • Page 139: Ieee1284

    Controller Options SP No. Title Setting SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1" SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0" 5. Check the operation. 6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). IEEE1284 •...

  • Page 140: Ieee 802.11 A/G, G (Wireless Lan)

    2. Installation IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN) Installation Procedure • Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g, g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
  • Page 141 Controller Options 4. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them at the front left and rear left of the machine. 5. Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the front left of the machine. 6.
  • Page 142 2. Installation Installing Various Hardware Combinations • Refer to the above picture when installing the USB2.0/SD. UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g, g.
  • Page 143 Controller Options Range of Allowed Settings: 64 bit: 10 characters 128 bit: 26 characters 9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the closest machine or access point.

  • Page 144: Bluetooth

    2. Installation SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting. WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting. Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used WEP Mode for the WEP Key entry. Bluetooth •...

  • Page 145: Pictbridge

    Controller Options 3. Insert the Bluetooth card [B] into the Bluetooth card adaptor. 4. Install the Bluetooth card adaptor on the Bluetooth board. 5. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth board. 6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section).

  • Page 146: Browser Unit Type E

    2. Installation 3. Turn the SD card label face of the PictBridge [A] to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 until you hear a click. 4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch, and then execute "Move Exec" with SP5-873-001. •...
  • Page 147 Controller Options 1. Remove the SD slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). 2. Remove the VM card [B] from the SD slot 2. 3. Turn the SD-card label face of the Browser Unit [A] to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 [A] until you hear a click.

  • Page 148: Gigabit Ethernet

    2. Installation 12. Under "Install to" touch "Machine HDD" and touch "Next". 13. When you see "Ready to Install", check the information on the screen to confirm your previous selection. 14. Touch "OK". You will see "Installing the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed". 15.
  • Page 149 Controller Options 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 8) 2. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] from the I/F-slot ( x 1). 3. Remove the controller bracket [B] ( x 2).

  • Page 150: Check All Connections

    2. Installation 4. Install the Gigabit Ethernet board [A] in the connector [B] on the controller board. 5. Secure the GigabitEthernet board [A] to the controller box ( x 2). 6. Reassemble the controller bracket ( x 2) and rear cover ( x 8).

  • Page 151: Preventive Maintenance

    3. Preventive Maintenance Maintenance Tables See "Appendices" for the following information: • Preventive Maintenance Items • Other Yield Parts...

  • Page 152: Pm Parts Settings

    3. Preventive Maintenance PM Parts Settings Before Removing the Old PM Parts 1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004. 3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM counters automatically.

  • Page 153: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    PM Parts Settings • PCU/ ITB Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full) After Installing the New PM parts 1. Turn on the main power switch. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values. 3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-803. If the PM counter for a unit was not reset, then reset that counter with SP 7-804.
  • Page 154 3. Preventive Maintenance...

  • Page 155: Replacement And Adjustment

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand • Installing options, please do the following: • If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user- programmed items, and the system parameter list. •...

  • Page 156: Special Tools

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Special Tools Part Number Description Q’ty B645 5010 SD Card G021 9350 Loop-back Connector - Parallel C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A257 9300 Grease Barrierta – S552R A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) B679 5100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C A184 9501 Optics Adjustment Tool (2 pcs/set)

  • Page 157: Image Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Image Adjustment Scanning Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments. • Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification A: Sub-scan magnification 1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2.

  • Page 158: Ardf

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration A: Leading Edge Registration 1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 0 ±...
  • Page 159 Image Adjustment A: Leading edge registration, B: Side-to-Side registration Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above. 1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. 2.

  • Page 160: Registration

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Registration Image Area A = 4.2 mm, B = 2.25 mm, C = 3.25 Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below. Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed. Side to Side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station.

  • Page 161: Erase Margin Adjustment

    Image Adjustment Adjustment Procedure 1. Enter SP2-109-003. 2. Print out the test pattern (14: Trimming Area) with SP2-109-003. • Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some pages of the "Trimming Area" for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP mode.

  • Page 162: Color Registration

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 1. Enter SP2-109-003. 2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003. 3. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -010 if necessary. • Leading edge: 1.5 to 5.0 mm, •...

  • Page 163: Printer Gamma Correction

    Image Adjustment 1. After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position adjustment if you install the machine at the user location.) if the machine is pre-installed at the workshop and moved to the user location, 2.
  • Page 164 4. Replacement and Adjustment Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the Shadow (High ID) density of level 8 matches that of (K, C, M, and Y) level 8 on the C-4 chart. For adjusting Shadow: Soft keys on the operation panel (SP4-918-009) Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the...
  • Page 165 Image Adjustment Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the Highlight (Low ID) copy and the density of level 3 is (K, C, M, and Y) slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.
  • Page 166 4. Replacement and Adjustment Printer Mode There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001): • 1200 x 1200 photo mode • 1200 x 1200 text mode • 2400 x 600 photo mode • 2400 x 600 text mode •...

  • Page 167: Exterior Covers

    Exterior Covers Exterior Covers PCDU Toner Collection Bottle If you replace this toner collection bottle after the machine detects that it is full or near-full, the machine automatically resets the PM counter for the PCDU toner collection bottle after replacement. But, if you replace a bottle that is not full or near-full, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit.

  • Page 168: Itb Cleaning Unit Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. PCDU toner collection bottle ( p.165) 3. Release the belt [A]. 4. Front door [A] ( x 2, pin x 2) ITB Cleaning Unit Cover 1. Open the ITB cleaning unit cover [A] ( x 2).

  • Page 169: Left Cover

    Exterior Covers 2. Release the tab [A], and then remove the ITB cleaning unit cover [B]. Left Cover 1. Left cover [A] ( x 10)

  • Page 170: Rear Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Rear Cover 1. Rear cover [A] ( x 8) Rear Lower Cover 1. Rear lower cover [A] ( x 5)

  • Page 171: Dust Filter

    Exterior Covers Dust Filter 1. Dust filter cover [A] (hooks) 2. Dust filter [B] Right Rear Cover 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Open the duplex unit [A]. 3. Right rear cover [B] ( x 5)

  • Page 172: Operation Panel

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Operation Panel 1. Remove six screws on the operation panel [A]. 2. Slide the operation panel to the front side. 3. Disconnect the harness [A]. 4. Operation panel [B] Touch Panel Position Adjustment • It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel at the following times: •...

  • Page 173: Inner Right Cover

    Exterior Covers Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only. 1. Press , press "1", "1", "9", "3", and then press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu. 2. On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press"1"). 3.

  • Page 174: Inner Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Press the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it up clockwise as shown above. 3. Inner right cover [B] ( x 2) Inner Cover 1. PCDU toner collection bottle ( p.165) 2. Inner right cover ( p.171) 3.

  • Page 175: Right Upper Cover

    Exterior Covers Right Upper Cover 1. Right upper cover [A] ( x 2) Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover 1. Left frame cover [A] ( x 1) 2. Left frame rear cover [B] ( x 2)

  • Page 176: Paper Exit Cover

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Paper Exit Cover 1. Inverter tray [A] 2. Paper exit cover [B] ( x 1) Inverter Tray 1. Inverter tray [A] (hooks)

  • Page 177: Inner Tray

    Exterior Covers Inner Tray 1. Inner tray [A] ( x 2) Inner Rear Cover 1. Left frame cover ( p.173 "Left Frame and Left Frame Rear Cover") 2. Paper exit cover ( p.174) 3. Inner tray ( p.175) 4. Inner rear cover [A] ( x 1)

  • Page 178: Scanner Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Scanner Unit Exposure Glass 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Open the ARDF or platen cover. 3. Glass cover [A] ( x 4) 4. Disconnect the DF I/F cable [A] 5. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 2)
  • Page 179 Scanner Unit 6. ARDF exposure glass [A] • Position the white marker [B] at the rear-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass. 7. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)

  • Page 180: Original Length Sensors

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Exposure glass [A] with left scale • Position the marker at the front-left corner when you reattach the exposure glass. Original Length Sensors 1. Exposure glass with left scale ( p.176) 2. SBU cover [A] ( x 6) •...

  • Page 181: Exposure Lamp

    Scanner Unit Exposure Lamp 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Operation panel ( p.170) 3. Exposure glass ( p.176) 4. Scanner rear cover [A] ( x 1) 5. Disconnect the connector [A] from the lamp stabilizer [B].
  • Page 182 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Move the carriage unit [A] to the cutout position [B]. 7. Cable guide [A] (hooks) • Keep the cable guide for reassembling. 8. Adjustor clamp [B] ( x 1) 9. Pulley [C]...
  • Page 183 Scanner Unit 10. Release the cable clamp [A] (one hook under the cable clamp) at the rear edge of the exposure lamp. 11. Hold down the snap [B], and then slide the exposure lamp [C] to the front side. 12. Exposure lamp [A] Reassembling...

  • Page 184: Scanner Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Run the cable so there is no slack. Slide the adjustor clamp [A] to adjust the cable slack. • [B]: Good • [C]: Not good Scanner Motor 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Scanner motor assembly [A] ( x 2, spring x 1, x 1, timing belt x 1) 3.

  • Page 185: Sensor Board Unit (Sbu)

    Scanner Unit Sensor Board Unit (SBU) 1. Exposure glass ( p.176) 2. Original length sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1 each) 3. Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, ground screw x 1, x 2) When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit: •...

  • Page 186: Exposure Lamp Stabilizer

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different. Exposure Lamp Stabilizer 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Exposure lamp stabilizer assembly [A] ( x 2, x 2) Scanner HP Sensor...

  • Page 187: Platen Cover Sensor

    Scanner Unit 4. Remove the mylar [A]. 5. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks). Platen Cover Sensor 1. Scanner rear cover ( p.179 "Exposure Lamp") 2. Holder bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Platen cover sensor [B] ( x 1) Front Scanner Wire 1.
  • Page 188 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Scanner left cover [A] ( x 2) 5. Scanner left stay [A] ( x 3) 6. Scanner front frame [B] ( x 5)
  • Page 189 Scanner Unit 7. Take aside the connector bracket [A] ( x 2). 8. Scanner rear frame [B] ( x 8, x all, x all) 9. Scanner motor assembly ( p.182) 10. Rear scanner drive pulley [A] ( x 1)
  • Page 190 4. Replacement and Adjustment 11. Front scanner wire clamp [A] 12. Loosen the front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1) 13. Front scanner wire 14. Move the shaft [C] in the red arrow direction ( x 1: at front), and remove the scanner drive pulley [D] ( x 1).
  • Page 191 Scanner Unit 1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. 2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) through the notch. 3. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times. Wind the left end clockwise three times.
  • Page 192 4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [A]. The end should go via the rear track of the right pulley [B] and the rear track of the movable pulley [C]. • Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time. 7.

  • Page 193: Rear Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit 8. Insert a scanner positioning pin [A] through the 2nd carriage hole [B] and the left holes [C] in the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [D] through the 1st carriage hole [E] and the right holes in the front rail [F].
  • Page 194 4. Replacement and Adjustment Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire 1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. 2. Pass the left end (with the ball) [B] through the drive pulley notch. Pass the right end (with the ring) through the drive pulley hole.
  • Page 195 Scanner Unit • When removing the rear scanner wire, removing the timing pulley [A] is required before moving the shaft ( x 1).

  • Page 196: Laser Optics

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Laser Optics • Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. Caution Decal Location The caution decal is placed as shown below. •...
  • Page 197 Laser Optics Preparing a new laser unit 1. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser unit ( x 4) 2. Polygon motor holder bracket [B] with a red tag ( x 3)
  • Page 198 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Install the three screws [C] (removed in step 2) in the laser unit. 4. Reinstall the polygon mirror motor cover [A] ( x 4). Before removing the old laser unit Do the following settings before removing the laser unit. These are adjustments for skew adjustment motors in the laser unit.
  • Page 199 Laser Optics Removing the laser unit 1. Left cover [A] ( x 10) 2. ITB cleaning unit [A] ( x 2)
  • Page 200 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Ventilation rear fan holder [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4. Ventilation front fan holder [B] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 5. Remove the laser unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 3) After installing a new laser unit Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser unit.

  • Page 201: Polygon Mirror Motor

    Laser Optics 4. Input the SP settings on the sheet provided with a new LD unit. • SP2-101-001 to -004: Color Registration: Main Scan for each color • SP2-101-013 to -016: Color Registration: Sub Scan for each color • SP2-102-001, -003, -004, -006, -007, -009, -010, -012: Main Magnification for each color and line speed •...
  • Page 202 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] ( x 4) 3. Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 1) 4. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1) After installing the laser optics housing unit: • Do the "Line Pos. Adjust Execute:Mode c" (SP2-111-003). •...

  • Page 203: Image Creation

    Image Creation Image Creation PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit) • Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve. 1. Open the front door. 2. PCDU toner collection bottle ( p.165) 3. Hold down the ITB lock lever [A] and turn it in the arrow direction. 4.

  • Page 204: Drum Unit And Development Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment When installing a new PCDU Remove the cover [A] on the toner inlet and pull out the tape [B] from the new development unit before installing a new PCDU in the machine. Drum Unit and Development Unit The new drum unit has a front cover.
  • Page 205 Image Creation • If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the development unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. 3. Turn the machine power off. 4. PCDU ( p.201) 5. Front cover [A] ( x 2) 6.
  • Page 206 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Drum unit [A] and development unit [B] ( x 1) • When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance mylar [A] with a vacuum cleaner. 8. Remove the connector [A] with a small flat tool [B].

  • Page 207: Toner Hopper Unit

    Image Creation • Keep this connector [A] for the new drum unit. 9. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure. 10. Execute the drum phase adjustment with SP1902-001 twice. New unit detection for the development unit When a new development unit is installed in the machine, the machine will automatically reset the PM counters for the development unit and drum unit, even if the drum unit was not changed.
  • Page 208 4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Place the toner hopper unit [A] on sheets of paper. Toner hopper unit: Y 1. Open the front door. 2. PCDU toner collection bottle ( p.165) 3. Inner cover ( p.172) 4. PCDU ( p.201) 5.
  • Page 209 Image Creation 8. Place the toner hopper unit [A] on sheets of paper. When installing a new toner hopper unit Developer must be added to the new toner hopper. Some developer (8 g) is provided with each new toner hopper unit. Pour this into the toner hopper unit before reattaching the inner cover. 1.

  • Page 210: Toner Supply Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Toner Supply Motor 1. Open the front door. 2. PCDU toner collection bottle ( p.165) 3. Inner cover ( p.172) 4. Inner tray ( p.175) 5. Toner supply drive gear [A] (hook x 1) 6. Pull the toner supply drive shaft [B]. 7.
  • Page 211 Image Creation When removing the toner supply gear unit for Yellow, one of screws on the toner supply gear unit is difficult to see. 1) Remove the left cover ( p.167). 2) Check the screw position [A] as shown above. 8.

  • Page 212: Toner Collection Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 9. Toner supply motor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 2) NOTE Apply “Silicon Grease G501” to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as shown below. • The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size. Toner Collection Motor 1.
  • Page 213 Image Creation 6. Toner collection motor assembly [A] ( x 2, x 3) 7. Gears [A] ( x 1) 8. Toner collection motor [A] ( x 2)

  • Page 214: Pcdu Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment NOTE Apply “Silicon Grease G501” to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as shown below. • The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size. PCDU Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor 1.

  • Page 215: Rfid Board

    Image Creation 2. PCDU toner collection bottle set switch [A] (hooks, x 1) RFID Board 1. All toner hopper units ( p.205) 2. Inner tray ( p.175) 3. Toner supply drive shafts [A]...
  • Page 216 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Harness cover [A] ( x 1) 5. RFID board [A] ( x 3, x 1)

  • Page 217: Image Transfer

    Image Transfer Image Transfer ITB Cleaning Unit If you replace the cleaning unit or toner collection bottle after the machine detects that it is full or near-full, the machine automatically resets the PM counter for the bottle after replacement. But, if you replace a bottle that is not full or near-full, then you must reset the PM counter for this unit. To do this, set SPs 3902-017 and -020 to 1 before you turn off the power switch.

  • Page 218: Itb Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment When installing the ITB cleaning unit Secure the front side [B] first with a screw. This [B] is the positioning screw. ITB Toner Collection Bottle Full Sensor 1. Left cover ( p.167) 2. Bottle full sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

  • Page 219: Itb Unit Motor

    Image Transfer 5. Release the arm [A] ( x 1). 6. Pull the lever [B] to open the paper transfer unit. 7. Harness cover [C] ( x 1) 8. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the ITB unit fully [B] ( x 2, x 1).

  • Page 220: Image Transfer Belt

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. ITB unit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) Image Transfer Belt 1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.215) 2. ITB unit ( p.216) 3. ITB unit motor ( p.217) 4. Two stays [A] ( x 2 each)
  • Page 221 Image Transfer 5. Front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front) ( x 1: M3x10) 6. Rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear) ( x 1: M3x10) 7. Handle [A] ( x 2: M3x10)
  • Page 222 4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Guide bracket [A] 9. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown. 10. Front guide pin bracket [A] ( x 1) 11. Press roller bracket [B] ( x 2)
  • Page 223 Image Transfer 12. Attach the handle [A], which was removed in step 7, to the projection [B] on the rear left side ( • This handle will be used as a stand in later steps. 13. Stand the ITB unit [A] as shown above. 14.

  • Page 224: Itb Contact Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for example) in the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims. • There are two rims (width [C]: about 5 mm) at the front and rear edges inside the image transfer belt.
  • Page 225 Image Transfer 4. Take aside the ITB contact motor unit [A] ( x 2) 5. Disconnect two harnesses [A], and then remove the ITB contact motor unit ( x 1) 6. Gears [A] ( x 1) 7. ITB contact motor [B] ( x 2)

  • Page 226: Itb Contact Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment NOTE Apply “Silicon Grease G501” to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as shown below. • The flat screwdriver in the photo is a small size. ITB Contact Sensor 1. ITB contact motor unit ( p.222 "ITB Contact Motor") 2.

  • Page 227: Paper Transfer

    Paper Transfer Paper Transfer PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit • If you install a new PTR unit, then set SP 3902-018 to "1" before you start this procedure. • If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.

  • Page 228: Paper Transfer Unit Full-Open

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • The spring tension of the tension lever is very strong. Be very careful to release the tension lever. Otherwise, your hand or fingers may be injured. 3. Remove the PTR unit [A], releasing the two locks [B]. 4.

  • Page 229: Id Sensor Board

    Paper Transfer 2. Release the arm [A] ( x 1). 3. Open the paper transfer unit [B] fully. ID Sensor Board 1. Duplex unit ( p.280) 2. Open the paper transfer unit fully ( p.226 "Paper Transfer Unit Full-Open"). 3. ID sensor cover [A] ( x 2)
  • Page 230 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. ID sensor board [A] ( x 6, , x 1, x 1) • If the black spacer [B] is stuck to the sensor board as shown above, remove all black spacers. These black spacers should be used when a new ID sensor board is installed. Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors require cleaning maintenance every EM.

  • Page 231: Ptr Contact Motor

    Paper Transfer • Do not use a dry cloth. Otherwise, the ID sensors may get more dirty due to static electricity. After installing a new ID sensor unit/board Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit/board. 1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. 2.
  • Page 232 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Disconnect the two harnesses [A] ( x 1). 6. Interlock switch bracket [B] ( x 3, x all) 7. Spring [A] • Do not forget to reinstall the spring [A] when reassembling. Otherwise, SC400 may occur. 8.

  • Page 233: Ptr Contact Sensor

    Paper Transfer 9. Gear [A] ( x 1, bearing x 1) 10. PTR contact motor [B] ( x 2, x 3) NOTE Apply “Silicon Grease G501“ to the gear of the motor. The appropriate amount of grease is as shown below. •...

  • Page 234: Temperature And Humidity Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. PTR contact sensor [A] (hooks, x 2, x 1) Temperature and Humidity Sensor 1. Right rear cover ( p.169) 2. Temperature and humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

  • Page 235: Drive Unit

    Drive Unit Drive Unit The drawing above shows the drive unit layout. 1. ITB unit motor 6. Drum/Development motor: K 2. Fusing/paper exit motor 7. Paper feed motor: T1 3. Drum motor: CMY 8. Paper feed motor: T2 4. Development motor: CMY 9.
  • Page 236 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box") 4. Remove all connectors and clamps (blue arrows) on the HVPS: CB board [A]. 5. Pull all the PCDUs to the front side. ( p.201) 6.

  • Page 237: Registration Motor

    Drive Unit When the result of this adjustment is "2" or "3": • Check that the all PCDUs are correctly set and that the ITB unit is correctly set. • Do "Drum Phase Adj." again after checking the PCDUs and ITB unit. When the result is still "2"...

  • Page 238: Paper Feed Motor: T1

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Paper Feed Motor: T1 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box") 4. Paper feed motor: T1 [A] ( x 1, x 2) • The picture below shows how to remove the screw [B] of the paper feed motor T1.

  • Page 239: Paper Feed Motor: T2

    Drive Unit Paper Feed Motor: T2 1. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 2. Paper feed motor: T2 [A] ( x 1, x 2) Drum Motor: CMY • Do not remove the PCDUs when you replace the drum motor-CMY. 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2.

  • Page 240: Development Motor: Cmy

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Drum motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1) Development Motor: CMY 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box") 4. Development motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1) Drum/Development Motor: K...

  • Page 241: Development Clutch: K

    Drive Unit 4. Drum/Development motor: K [A] ( x 3, x 1) Development Clutch: K 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box") 4. Drum/Development Motor: K ( p.238) 5.
  • Page 242 4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box") 4. Loosen the stay [A] ( x 1, hook [B] x 1) • The hook [B] is installed as shown above. Do not pull the stay by force, or the hook might be broken.
  • Page 243 Drive Unit...

  • Page 244: Fusing

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Fusing Fusing Unit • Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns. 1. Open the duplex unit. 2.

  • Page 245: Entrance Guide Plate

    Fusing If the fusing unit is stuck to the PTR unit and cannot be removed from the machine, keep your hand supporting the PTR unit as shown above and release very carefully the front tension lever [A] of the PTR unit. In this case, the PTR unit open lever [B] does not work to open the PTR unit.

  • Page 246: Stripper Plate

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Stripper Plate 1. Fusing unit ( p.242)
  • Page 247 Fusing 2. Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4) 3. Open the exit guide plate [A]. 4. Remove the e-rings [A] at the front and rear side, and then springs [B] at the front and rear side.

  • Page 248: Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Turn the stripper plate [A], and then remove it. Cleaning Requirement The stripper plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the stripper plate with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the following points. Exit Guide Plate Cleaning Procedure The exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval.

  • Page 249: Fusing Gear Shafts Lubrication Procedure

    Fusing 2. Open the exit guide plate [A]. 3. Clean the exit guide plate [A] with a cloth moistened with alcohol. Fusing Gear Shafts Lubrication Procedure The fusing gear shafts require cleaning maintenance (if it is dirty) at every 60 K interval. 1.

  • Page 250: Heating Roller Fusing Lamp

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Rear stay [A] ( x 2) 4. Fusing idle gears [B] 5. Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the gear shafts [A] of the fusing unit. The appropriate amount of grease is as shown above. The flat screwdriver [B] in the photo is a small size. Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 1.

  • Page 251: Heating Roller Unit

    Fusing 3. Remove the cords [A] from the rear stay ( x 2). 4. Rear lamp stay [B] ( x 2) 5. Remove the cords [C] from the front stay ( x 2). 6. Front lamp stay [D] ( x 2) 7.
  • Page 252 4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Terminal base [A] ( x 3) 5. Thermostat base [A] ( x 2) 6. Left frame [B] ( x 4) • Some cables are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Do not put any tension to the connected cables during this procedure.
  • Page 253 Fusing 7. Slide the front and rear flanges [A] to the outer sides to detach both flanges from the front and rear heating roller brackets. 8. Hold the both flange at the front and rear side of the heating roller unit [A], and then pull the heating roller unit [A].

  • Page 254: Pressure Roller

    4. Replacement and Adjustment When reinstalling the heating roller unit Make sure that the flange with mark “F” [A] is placed to the front side of the fusing unit when reinstalling the heating roller unit. Pressure Roller Cleaning Procedure The pressure roller requires cleaning maintenance (if it is dirty) at every 60 K interval. 1.
  • Page 255 Fusing • Clean the both ends [C] of the pressure roller as well as the center area. Replacement Procedure 1. Heating roller unit ( p.249) 2. Bearing [A] at the front end of the pressure roller (C-ring x 1) 3. Rear stay [A] ( x 2) 4.

  • Page 256: Heating Roller Thermostats

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 7. Pressure roller [A] When reassembling the pressure roller When replacing the pressure roller, you have to apply lubricant to the following places. • Apply "Barrierta S552R" to the front edge [A] and rear edge [B] of the pressure roller as shown above. Heating Roller Thermostats Side Heating Roller Thermostat 1.

  • Page 257: Heating Roller Thermistor

    Fusing 2. Side heating roller thermostat [A] ( x 2) • Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this. Lower Heating Roller Thermostats 1. Heating roller unit ( p.249) 1. Lower heating roller thermostats [A] ( x 2 each) •...

  • Page 258: Pressure Roller Thermistor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Heating roller thermistor bracket [A] ( x 1) 3. Heating roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1) Cleaning Requirement The heating roller thermistor requires cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the heating roller thermistor with a dry cloth.
  • Page 259 Fusing 3. Thermistor center assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4. Pressure roller thermistor: Center [A] ( x 1) Pressure Roller Thermistor: End 1. Fusing unit ( p.242) 2. Fusing upper cover ( p.244 "Stripper Plate")

  • Page 260: Thermopile

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. Thermistor end assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4. Pressure roller thermistor: End [A] ( x 1) Cleaning Requirement The pressure roller thermistors (center and end) require cleaning maintenance at every 60 K interval. Clean the pressure roller thermistors (center and end) with a dry cloth.
  • Page 261 Fusing 2. Thermopile base [A] ( x 2, x 1) 3. Thermopile [A] ( x 1) When cleaning the lens of the thermopile • Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down. Otherwise, you may get a serious burn. 1.

  • Page 262: Cleaning Unit (Option) Installation Procedure

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Clean the thermopile lens [A] with a dry cloth. Cleaning Unit (Option) Installation Procedure 1. Fusing unit ( p.242) 2. Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4)
  • Page 263 Fusing 3. Top right frame [A] ( x 2) 4. Install the cleaning unit [A] in the fusing unit. 5. Secure the cleaning unit [A] ( x 2) 6. Reassemble the fusing unit.

  • Page 264: Paper Feed

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Paper Feed Paper Tray 1. Pull paper tray 1 or 2 [A] part of the way out. 2. Remove two screws from both tray guides. 3. Pull out paper tray 1 or 2 [A]. Feed Roller Tray 1 and Tray 2 1.

  • Page 265: Friction Pad

    Paper Feed When reinstalling the feed roller Do not touch the feed roller with your bare hands when replacing it. If you do, clean the feed roller with a damp cloth or alcohol. Friction Pad 1. Paper tray 1 or 2 ( p.262) 2.

  • Page 266: Paper Size Switch

    4. Replacement and Adjustment When reinstalling the friction pad Make sure that the mylar [A] does not go under the friction pad when reinstalling the friction pad. Do not touch the friction pad with your bare hands, when replacing it. If you do, clean the friction pad with a damp cloth or alcohol.

  • Page 267: Paper End Sensor

    Paper Feed 2. Paper size switch [A] (hooks, x 1) Paper End Sensor Paper End Sensor: T1 1. Paper tray 1 and 2 ( p.262) 2. Release the two clamps [A]. 3. Paper end sensor: T1 [B] (hooks, x 1) Paper End Sensor: T2 1.

  • Page 268: Registration Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Release the clamp [A]. 3. Paper end sensor: T2 [B] (hooks, x 1) Registration Sensor 1. Duplex unit ( p.280) 2. Open the paper transfer unit to the fully-open position ( p.226). 3. Registration roller guide [A] ( x 2)
  • Page 269 Paper Feed 4. Close the paper transfer unit [A]. 5. Relay guide plate [B] ( x 2) 6. Upper vertical transport guide [C] ( x 1, x 4) 7. Registration sensor [A] ( x 2, hooks, x 1)

  • Page 270: Vertical Transport Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Cleaning the registration roller Clean the registration roller and registration idle roller [A] with a damp cloth every 60 K (total count). • Never use alcohol to clean the registration roller. Vertical Transport Sensor Vertical Transport Sensor 1 1.
  • Page 271 Paper Feed 3. Open the lower right door [A]. 4. Release the belt [B]. 5. Open the lower guide plate [A] 6. Middle guide bracket [B] ( x 4, x 2, x 1) 7. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
  • Page 272 4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Vertical transport sensor 1 [B] ( x 1, hooks) Vertical Transport Sensor 2 1. Duplex unit ( p.280) 2. Open the lower right door [A]. 3. Release the belt [B]. 4. Release the rear pivot [A], and then remove the lower right door [B].
  • Page 273 Paper Feed 5. Lower guide bracket [A] ( x 2) 6. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1) 7. Vertical transport sensor 2 [B] (hooks, x 1)

  • Page 274: Paper Exit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Paper Exit Junction Gate Solenoid Fan 1. Right upper cover ( p.173) 2. Right rear cover ( p.169) 3. Fan base [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4. Junction gate solenoid fan [B] (hooks) When installing the junction gate solenoid fan Make sure that the junction gate solenoid fan is installed with its decal facing to the left side.
  • Page 275 Paper Exit 6. Front harness cover [A] ( x 1) 7. Remove or disconnect the following: • Two screws [A] at the front side • Front harness [B] • Ground cable [C] ( x 1) • Rear harness [D]...

  • Page 276: Fusing Exit Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Paper exit unit [A] Fusing Exit Sensor 1. Paper exit unit ( p.272) 2. Sensor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)

  • Page 277: Paper Exit Sensor

    Paper Exit 3. Fusing exit sensor [A] ( x 1) Paper Exit Sensor 1. Paper exit unit ( p.272) 2. Paper exit sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)

  • Page 278: Inverter Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment When installing the paper exit sensor • Stand the paper exit unit so that [A] is facing up. Otherwise, the paper exit sensor feeler interrupts the installation of the paper exit sensor. • Insert the hook [B] first. Inverter Sensor 1.

  • Page 279: Inverter Motor

    Paper Exit 4. Move the sensor assembly [A] to the cutout [B], and then remove it ( x 1) 5. Inverter sensor [A] (hooks) Inverter Motor 1. Paper exit unit ( p.272)

  • Page 280: Fusing Front Fan

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Inverter motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) Fusing Front Fan 1. Front right cover ( p.172) 2. Fusing front fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) When installing the fusing front fan Make sure that the fusing front fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side.
  • Page 281 Paper Exit Make sure that harnesses are correctly set [A] along the guide on the fan frame without slack [B]. Otherwise, the some of the wires could be pinched and damaged or cut between the fan frame and the frame of the main machine.

  • Page 282: Duplex Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Duplex Unit Duplex Unit 1. Remove the screw [A]. 2. Open the duplex unit. 3. Move the duplex unit in the direction shown by , and remove the hook [A]. 4. Disconnect the harness [B].

  • Page 283: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    Duplex Unit 5. Release the front and rear arms [A], [B] ( x 1 each). 6. Remove the clip [A]. 7. Slide the duplex unit [B] to the front side, and then remove it. Duplex Entrance Sensor 1. Duplex unit ( p.280)
  • Page 284 4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. Duplex inner cover [A] ( x 2) 3. Duplex entrance guide unit [A] (hook x 3) • Lift up the duplex guide plate [A] first when reinstalling the duplex entrance guide unit. 4. Duplex outer guide plate [A] ( x 4)

  • Page 285: Duplex Exit Sensor

    Duplex Unit 5. Duplex entrance sensor [A] (hook) Duplex Exit Sensor 1. Pull out the 1st tray. 2. Duplex unit ( p.280) 3. Duplex exit sensor assembly cover [A] ( x 1) 4. Duplex exit sensor assembly [B] ( x 1, ground screw x 1, x 1, x 1)

  • Page 286: Duplex Entrance Motor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Duplex exit sensor [A] (hook) Duplex Entrance Motor 1. Duplex unit ( p.280) 2. Duplex inner cover ( p.281 "Duplex Entrance Sensor") 3. Duplex entrance motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)

  • Page 287: Duplex Exit Motor

    Duplex Unit 4. Separate the duplex entrance motor [A] from the bracket ( x 2) Duplex Exit Motor 1. Duplex unit ( p.280) 2. Duplex inner cover ( p.281 "Duplex Entrance Sensor") 3. Duplex exit motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2, x 1)

  • Page 288: By-Pass Tray Unit

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 3. By-pass motor with the bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2, x 1) • Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket to disconnect the harness. 4. By-pass motor [A] ( x 2) By-pass Tray Unit 1.

  • Page 289: By-Pass Paper Length Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4. Disconnect the harness [A]. 5. Close the duplex unit. 6. Open the by-pass tray unit [A] 7. By-pass tray unit ( x 2, hook [B]). • Use a flat-head screw driver or similar tool to push the hook [B] down. By-pass Paper Length Sensor 1.

  • Page 290: By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 2. By-pass tray right cover [A] ( x 2) 3. By-pass paper length sensor [A] ( x 1) By-Pass Paper Size Sensor 1. By-pass tray unit ( p.286) 2. By-pass tray cover [A] (hook x 1)
  • Page 291 Duplex Unit 3. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1) When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor 1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered). 2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the projection [C] of the left side fence bar.

  • Page 292: By-Pass Paper End Sensor

    4. Replacement and Adjustment A4 SEF 00000011 A6 SEF 00001101 B5 SEF 00000111 Smaller A6 SEF 00001101 By-pass Paper End Sensor 1. By-pass tray unit ( p.286) 2. By-pass paper end sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) Reinstalling the By-pass Paper End Sensor •...

  • Page 293: By-Pass Tray Hp Sensor

    Duplex Unit By-pass Tray HP Sensor 1. Open the by-pass tray unit. 2. Open the duplex unit. 3. Remove the hand holder [A]. 4. Rotate the actuator [A] counter clockwise as shown above. 5. By-pass tray HP sensor [B] (hook).

  • Page 294: Electrical Components

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Electrical Components Boards Controller Box Closed Controller Board SDVDB (Shut Down and Voltage Detection Board)

  • Page 295: Controller Box Cover

    Electrical Components Controller Box Open HVPS: TTS Board HVPS: CB Board Controller Box Cover 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Remove the scanner cable bracket [A] ( x 3) 3. Loosen the five screws pointed by the arrow marks in the picture above. 4.

  • Page 296: Controller Box

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Controller Box Opening the controller box 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. Controller box cover ( p.293) 4. Remove the three screws and disconnect the scanner cable [A] (ground screw x 1) 5.
  • Page 297 Electrical Components 3. BCU [A] ( x 7, x All) • Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the NVRAM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the downward side. When installing the new BCU 1.

  • Page 298: Hdd

    4. Replacement and Adjustment • Copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846-051 before replacing the HDD if possible. 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Controller box cover ( p.293) 3. Open the BCU bracket [A] ( x 5, x 4, x 3, flat cable x 2).

  • Page 299: Ipu Board

    Electrical Components 2. Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the HDD. 3. Do SP5846-052 to copy back the address book to the hard disk from the SD card to which you have already copied the address book data if possible. 4.

  • Page 300: Controller Box Fan

    4. Replacement and Adjustment Controller Box Fan 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box"). 3. Controller box fan with bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 4. Controller box fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)

  • Page 301: Fusing Rear Fan

    Electrical Components Fusing Rear Fan 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box"). 3. Fusing rear fan with the bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) 4. Disconnect the connector [A]. 5. Remove the bottom bracket [B] (hook x 5).

  • Page 302: Drb

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 6. Fusing rear fan [A] When installing the fusing rear fan Make sure that the fusing rear fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear side. 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3.

  • Page 303: Psu

    Electrical Components 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. SDVDB [A] ( x 3, x 5) 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Rear lower cover ( p.168) 3. DRB with the bracket [A] ( x 4, x all, x all)

  • Page 304: Hvps: Tts Board

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 4. Power cord [A] (Blue: ground screw x 1, x 2) 5. Remove the clamp [B] from the bracket. 6. PSU board [C] ( x 9, x All, x All) HVPS: TTS Board 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2.

  • Page 305: Controller Board

    Electrical Components 3. HVPS: CB board [A] ( x 6, All Controller Board 1. Rear cover ( p.168) 2. Open the controller box ( p.294 "Controller Box") 3. Controller box fan bracket ( p.298 "Controller Box Fan") 4. Controller box left bracket [A] ( x 6)
  • Page 306 4. Replacement and Adjustment 5. Controller board assembly [A] ( x 7, x 2) 6. Remove the SD cards [A], interface rails [B], NVRAM [C] and RAM-DIMMs [D]. 7. Controller board [E]...
  • Page 307 Electrical Components When installing a new controller board 1. Install the NVRAM from the old controller board on a new controller board. 2. Install the new controller board in the machine. 3. Disconnect the cables of the HDD from the controller board. •...
  • Page 308 4. Replacement and Adjustment Restoring the Encryption key When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed, updating the encryption key is required. 1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized. 2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card. 3.

  • Page 309: Nvram Replacement Procedure

    Electrical Components 14. Reinstall the HDD. Clearing the NVRAM When replacing the controller board and a customer has lost the encryption key, clearing the NVRAM is required to recover the HDD encryption unit. 1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized. 2.

  • Page 310: Nvram On The Controller

    4. Replacement and Adjustment 8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on. 9. SC195 occurs. 10. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have successfully copied them to the SD card. 11.
  • Page 311 Electrical Components 8. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1). 9. Remove the Security SD from SD slot 1. 10. Install a new Security SD in SD slot 1. 11. Turn the main switch on. 12. SC995-02 occurs. 13. Turn the machine off. 14.
  • Page 312 4. Replacement and Adjustment...

  • Page 313: System Maintenance

    5. System Maintenance Service Program Mode • Make sure that the data-in LED is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data. SP Tables There are most commonly used SP codes in the "Main SP Tables - 1 to - 9"...
  • Page 314 5. System Maintenance SP Mode Button Summary Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons. Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,...

  • Page 315: Selecting The Program Number

    Service Program Mode Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press . (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If not, just press the required SP Mode number.) Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation.
  • Page 316 5. System Maintenance • Refer to the SP Tables for the range of allowed settings. 5. Do this procedure to enter a setting: • Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.

  • Page 317: Remarks

    Service Program Mode • Change SP5169 from "1" to "0". • Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the machine. • The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON. Remarks Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters.
  • Page 318 5. System Maintenance Others The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables. FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.) DFU: Design/Factory Use only Do not touch these SP modes in the field.

  • Page 319: Main Sp Tables-1

    Main SP Tables-1 Main SP Tables-1 SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing 1001 for each mode.
  • Page 320 5. System Maintenance 011 Tray:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG 012 Tray:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG 013 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 014 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 015 By-pass:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 016 By-pass:Thick2:1200dpi *ENG 017 By-pass:Thick3:1200dpi *ENG 018 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG 019 Duplex:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 020 Duplex:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG [Side-to-Side Registration] Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each...
  • Page 321 Main SP Tables-1 001 Tray1:Plain:600dpi *ENG 002 Tray1:Thick1:600dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 2 / 1 mm/step] 003 Tray1:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG 004 Tray234:Plain:600dpi *ENG 005 Tray234:Thick1:600dpi *ENG 006 Tray234:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG 007 By-pass:Plain:600dpi *ENG 008 By-pass:Thick1:600dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 009 By-pass:Thick2:600dpi *ENG 010 By-pass:Thick3:600dpi...
  • Page 322 5. System Maintenance 1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display 0:LT SEF/ 1:LG *ENG Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass tray. This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than 8.5". 0: LT SEF (default), 1: LG [Reload Permit Setting] 1101...
  • Page 323 Main SP Tables-1 Temp.:Delta:Warm: Center *ENG [0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 5 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is determined as warm state. Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [40 to 200 / NA: 45, EU/AA: 35 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
  • Page 324 5. System Maintenance Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state. Rotation Time:BW:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state.
  • Page 325 Main SP Tables-1 Rotation Time:BW:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the fusing unit is determined as hot state. 030 Flicker Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Temp.:Delta:Cold:...
  • Page 326 5. System Maintenance 005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 65 / 1 deg/step] 006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 100 / 35 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center:Sp.1 008 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 35 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:Upper...
  • Page 327 Main SP Tables-1 1105 [Print Target Temp] (Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex) Roller Type –> Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure –> Pressure roller Paper Type -> Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special Destination: NA; North America, TWN; Taiwan, EU; Europe, AA; Asia Pasific [100 to 160 / NA: 150, EU/AA: 141 / 1 deg/ Plain1:FC:Center *ENG...
  • Page 328 5. System Maintenance 012 Thin:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 013 M-thick:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 160 / 1 deg/step] 014 M-thick:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 015 M-thick:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg/step] 016 M-thick:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 329 Main SP Tables-1 038 Special3:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 039 Special3:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 175 / 145 / 1 deg/step] 040 Special3:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 041 Envelop:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 175 / 1 deg/step] 042 Envelop:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 330 5. System Maintenance Special1:FC:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special1:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 130 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special1:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:FC:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:FC:Press:Low *ENG...
  • Page 331 Main SP Tables-1 139 M-thick:Grossy:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step] 140 M-thick:Grossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 141 Special4:FC:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 155 / 1 deg/step] 142 Special4:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 143 Special4:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 332 5. System Maintenance The heating roller has two lamps. One heats the center of the heating roller and the other heats both ends of the heating roller. 003 Pressure Center [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 005 Thermister Atmosphere [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step] The pressure roller has no lamp.
  • Page 333 Main SP Tables-1 Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job. 1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing] Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature.
  • Page 334 5. System Maintenance Temp.:Normal:Center:Level2 *ENG [-25 to 10 / -10 / 1 /step] Specifies the subtractive temperature level 2 of the fusing temperature control for variable job images. 003- [Envir. Correct:Fusing] Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction in the low temperature condition.
  • Page 335 Main SP Tables-1 Permit Temp.:Delta:Press:H- *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] humid Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity. [Stand-by Mode Setting] P-Roll Thresh AF Job *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step] CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]...
  • Page 336 5. System Maintenance Htg Roller:End Diff1 *ENG [-100 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the calculated temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued. Htg Roller:End Det1 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the detected temperature at the end of the heating roller when an SC was issued.
  • Page 337 Main SP Tables-1 1142 [Fusing Jam Detection] [0 or 1 / 0 / -] SC Display *ENG 0: ON, 1: OFF Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection. 1153 [Low Temp. Start Up] 001 Temp.:Threshold Value1 * ENG [-10 to 100 / 5 / 1°C./step] Sepcifies the threshold temperature 1 for the warming up in the low temperature condition.
  • Page 338 5. System Maintenance 005 Color OpcMot:120 *ENG [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 %/step] 006 Color OpcMot:60 *ENG 007 Fusing Mot:120 *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.4 / 0.01 %/step] 008 Fusing Mot:60:Thick *ENG [–6 to 6 / -0.05 / 0.01 %/step] 009 Transfer Mot:120 *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %/step]...
  • Page 339 Main SP Tables-1 031 Offset:120:Color *ENG [-7 to 7 / 0 /1step] 032 Offset:60:Color *ENG 033 Regist Mot:60:1200dpi *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step] 034 Feed1:CW60:1200dpi *ENG 035 Feed1:CCW60:1200dpi *ENG 036 Feed2:CW60:1200dpi *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step] 037 Feed2:CCW60:1200dpi *ENG 038 By-pass:60:1200dpi...

  • Page 340: Main Sp Tables-2

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-2 SP2-XXX (Drum) 2013 [Envir. Correct:PCU] Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity. [1 to 5 / – / 1 /step] 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m 001 Envir. Range:FC:Display *ENG 2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m 3: MM (11.3 <...
  • Page 341 Main SP Tables-2 [Color Regist Adjust] These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted 2101 at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001 after replacing the laser optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment"...
  • Page 342 5. System Maintenance 001 Lead Edge *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step] 002 Trailing Edge *ENG 003 Left *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step] 004 Right *ENG 006 Duplex Trail. L Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step] 007 Duplex Trail.
  • Page 343 Main SP Tables-2 Pattern Selection [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] 0 None 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 2: Vertical Line (2dot) 13. Independent Pattern (4dot) 3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area 4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal) 5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal) 6: Grid Horizontal Line...
  • Page 344 5. System Maintenance Executes the rough line position adjustment once. After doing this SP, make sure to execute 003 Execute:Mode c SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line position adjustment is not perfectly done. 2112 [TM/P Sensor Test] ID Sensor Check FA This SP is used to check the ID sensors at the factory.
  • Page 345 Main SP Tables-2 [P-Sensor Test] Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check. 2140 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 PWM *ENG [TM-Sensor Test] 005 PWM: Front *ENG [0 to 1024 / 0 / 1/step] 006 PWM: Center *ENG...
  • Page 346 5. System Maintenance 001 Maximum *ENG [TM-Sensor Test] 005 Maximum: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 006 Maximum: Center *ENG 007 Maximum: Rear *ENG [P-Sensor Test] Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check. 2143 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Minimum...
  • Page 347 Main SP Tables-2 [P-Sensor Test] Displays the minimum result 2 values of the ID sensor check. 2145 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Minimum 2 *ENG [TM-Sensor Test] 005 Minimum 2: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 006 Minimum 2: Center...
  • Page 348 5. System Maintenance 009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step] 010 Error Counter: C *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Not done 011 Error Counter: M *ENG 1: Completed successfully 2: Cannot detect patterns 3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target 012 Error Counter: Y...
  • Page 349 Main SP Tables-2 Positive:after JAM *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step] Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller. 004 Negative:after JAM *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step] [Common: BW: Bias] 2351 Image Transfer Belt: B/W: Bias Adjustment...
  • Page 350 5. System Maintenance Image Transfer: Low Speed:M *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for thick 1 paper. Image Transfer: Low Speed:Y *ENG [0 to 60 / 14 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1 paper.
  • Page 351 Main SP Tables-2 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1 *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width) 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1 *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2...
  • Page 352 5. System Maintenance [100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step] 014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step] 015 PaperTransfer: Low:1st:S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 360 / 5%/step] 016 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S4...
  • Page 353 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 4000 / 160 / 5%/step] 006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 140 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm >...
  • Page 354 5. System Maintenance [100 to 4000 / 465 / 5%/step] 016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2st Side: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 220 / 5%/step] 017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm >...
  • Page 355 Main SP Tables-2 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 – A /step] Adjusts the transfer current of the paper transfer roller for the 1st side of gloss paper in full color mode. [Thick 1: Bias: BW] 2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in black-and-white mode.
  • Page 356 5. System Maintenance 010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3 *ENG Not used [100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) 014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4 *ENG Not used [100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step] 017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5...
  • Page 357 Main SP Tables-2 018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd: S5 *ENG Not used [Thick 2: Bias: BW] 2553 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in black-and-white mode. Thick: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG Not used...
  • Page 358 5. System Maintenance 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG Not used [Thick 3: Bias: FC] 2652 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color mode. Thick: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG...
  • Page 359 Main SP Tables-2 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 – A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 13 / 1 –...
  • Page 360 5. System Maintenance [100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3...
  • Page 361 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step] 018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step] 019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step] 020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5 *ENG...
  • Page 362 5. System Maintenance [100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step] 010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3...
  • Page 363 Main SP Tables-2 [SP 4: Bias: BW] 2783 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in black-and-white mode. Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 – A /step] [SP 4: Bias: FC] 2787 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode.
  • Page 364 5. System Maintenance [SP4,5,6-T:Size Correct:FC] Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 2792 SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values. Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step] 001 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG S1 size >...
  • Page 365 Main SP Tables-2 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 28 / 1 – A /step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 – A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 14 / 1 –...
  • Page 366 5. System Maintenance 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 14 / 1 – A /step] [SP 6: Bias: BW] 2883 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 6 in black-and-white mode. Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 –...

  • Page 367: Main Sp Tables-3

    Main SP Tables-3 Main SP Tables-3 SP3-XXX (Process) 3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution] Executes the normal process control manually (potential control). 001 Normal Procon Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing this SP. Executes the toner density adjustment manually. 002 Toner Density Adjst Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing this SP.
  • Page 368 5. System Maintenance 001 History: Latest *ENG 002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG 003 Result: Latest 2 *ENG 004 Result: Latest 3 *ENG 005 Result: Latest 4 *ENG [1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 006 Result: Latest 5 *ENG 007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG 008 Result: Latest 7 *ENG...
  • Page 369 Main SP Tables-3 3015 [Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color]) 001 Execution: ALL 002 Execution: COL (MCY) 003 Execution: Bk Executes the manual toner supply to the development unit. 004 Execution: C 005 Execution: M 006 Execution: Y [Forced Toner Supply Cntl] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color]) 3016 Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
  • Page 370 5. System Maintenance 006 Upper Counter: Bk *ENG 007 Upper Counter: C *ENG 008 Upper Counter: M *ENG Displays the total times of the Vt upper or lower 009 Upper Counter: Y *ENG limit error. 010 Lower Counter: Bk *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 times/step] 011 Lower Counter: C *ENG...
  • Page 371 Main SP Tables-3 005 Execution Flag: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 006 Execution Flag: C *ENG 0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor 007 Execution Flag: M *ENG initialization. 008 Execution Flag: Y *ENG 3041...
  • Page 372 5. System Maintenance [Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color]) 3044 Selects the toner supply method type. 001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with SP 3401) 002 C *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed) 003 M...
  • Page 373 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated by the operating 009-012 times of the toner supply pumps. 009 Toner Remaining: Bk *ENG 010 Toner Remaining: C *ENG [–50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 011 Toner Remaining: M *ENG 012 Toner Remaining: Y...
  • Page 374 5. System Maintenance 028 Pixel: Consumption: Bk *ENG 029 Pixel: Consumption: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 030 Pixel: Consumption: M *ENG 031 Pixel: Consumption: Y *ENG 032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count. 032 Pixel: Remaining : Bk *ENG 033 Pixel: Remaining : C...
  • Page 375 Main SP Tables-3 050 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Bk *ENG 051 TE Sn Detect Thresh:C *ENG [1 to 600 / 57 / 1 g/step] 052 TE Sn Detect Thresh:M *ENG 053 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Y *ENG [TE Count: Display] 3131 Display the number of toner end detections for each color. 001 Bk *ENG 002 C...
  • Page 376 5. System Maintenance 005 Initial: Bk *ENG 006 Initial: C *ENG [2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Initial: M *ENG 008 Initial: Y *ENG [Vtcnt: Display/Set] 3222 Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color. 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: C...
  • Page 377 Main SP Tables-3 001 Lower: Bk *ENG 002 Lower: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Lower: M *ENG 004 Lower: Y *ENG 005 Upper: Bk *ENG 006 Upper: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Upper: M *ENG 008 Upper: Y...
  • Page 378 5. System Maintenance 001 Low Coverage Coeff. Bk *ENG 002 Low Coverage Coeff.C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step] 003 Low Coverage Coeffi.M *ENG 004 Low Coverage Coeff. Y *ENG 005 High Coverage Coeff, Bk *ENG 006 High Coverage Coeff, C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.3 / 0.01 V/step] 007 High Coverage Coeff, M...
  • Page 379 Main SP Tables-3 023 Process Control Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 time/step] [Toner Supply Consum.: Display] 3236 Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color. 001 Latest: Bk *ENG 002 Latest: C *ENG [0 to 40000 / 0 / 0.1 mg/step] 003 Latest: M...
  • Page 380 5. System Maintenance 005 Offset: Bk *ENG These are additional values for calculating the charge bias referring to the development bias at 006 Offset: C *ENG process control. [0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step] 007 Offset: M *ENG DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 + 0.001 008 Offset: Y *ENG...
  • Page 381 Main SP Tables-3 013 Average L: Bk *ENG 014 Average L: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step] 015 Average L: M *ENG 016 Average L: Y *ENG 017-019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-005 to -016. 017 Total Page Setting: S *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step] 018 Total Page Setting: M...
  • Page 382 5. System Maintenance 005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments. 005 Voffset dif: C *ENG 006 Voffset dif: M *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG 008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments. 008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG 009 Voffset TM (Center)
  • Page 383 Main SP Tables-3 001 Ifsg: Bk *ENG 002 Ifsg: C *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step] 003 Ifsg: M *ENG 004 Ifsg: Y *ENG 005 Ifsg TM (Front) *ENG 006 Ifsg TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 mA/step] 007 Ifsg TM (Rear) *ENG 3324...
  • Page 384 5. System Maintenance 001 Latest *ENG 002 Latest 1 *ENG 003 Latest 2 *ENG [111 to 999 / 999 / 1 /step] 004 Latest 3 *ENG 9: Unexpected error 005 Latest 4 *ENG 3: Offset voltage error 006 Latest 5 *ENG 2: Vsg adjustment value error 007 Latest 6...
  • Page 385 Main SP Tables-3 001 Latest: Bk *ENG 002 Latest: C *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step] 003 Latest: M *ENG 004 Latest: Y *ENG 3421 [Toner Supply Range] 001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG 002 Upper Limit: C *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during printing.
  • Page 386 5. System Maintenance 001 Process Control: BW *ENG 002 Process Control: FC *ENG 003 Power ON: BW *ENG 004 Power ON: FC *ENG 005 MUSIC: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 006 MUSIC: FC *ENG 007 Vsg Adj. *ENG 008 Charge AC Control *ENG...
  • Page 387 Main SP Tables-3 024 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step] 025 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step] 026 Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step] 027 Correction Coeff.
  • Page 388 5. System Maintenance 002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step] 003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm /step] [Execution Interval: Display] Displays the current interval for process control execution. 3515 When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
  • Page 389 Main SP Tables-3 006 Pixel Coverage Sum: Bk *ENG 007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C *ENG 008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M *ENG 009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y *ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm /step] 010 Required Area: Bk *ENG 011 Required Area: C *ENG...
  • Page 390 5. System Maintenance 029 Refresh:Page Thresh *ENG 030 Mode Counter:Bk *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 031 Mode Counter:FC *ENG [Blade Damage Prevention] Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt 3517 cleaning unit from being damaged.
  • Page 391 Main SP Tables-3 [Toner End Prohibition Setting] 3519 Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end. 001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner end 002 MUSIC *ENG condition) 1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner end 003 TC Adjustment *ENG condition)
  • Page 392 5. System Maintenance [Rapi Timer] Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the time-out time to get the Rapi timer. [Non-use Time Process Control Setting] Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by. 3531 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is executed.
  • Page 393 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the standard target development gamma for each color. 009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 010 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG 011 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 012 Y (Standard Target Set)
  • Page 394 5. System Maintenance [Dev. DC Control:Display] Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 70 mm/sec 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color. 001 Normal Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Normal Speed:C *ENG 003 Normal Speed:M *ENG 004 Normal Speed:Y *ENG...
  • Page 395 Main SP Tables-3 [Charge DC Control: Display] Normal: 120 mm/sec 3641 Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color. 001 Normal Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Normal Speed:C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.75 / 0.01 kV/step] 003 Normal Speed:M *ENG 004 Normal Speed:Y...
  • Page 396 5. System Maintenance 006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step] 007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step] 008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2...
  • Page 397 Main SP Tables-3 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / 9 / 1 /step] [HST Control: M] 3713 Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU. 001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]...
  • Page 398 5. System Maintenance 005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.1 V/step] 007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.2 / 0.1 V/step] 008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.3 / 0.1 V/step] 009 Serial Number 1...
  • Page 399 Main SP Tables-3 Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step] Adjusts the toner amount between near full and full. (0.1 indicates 10%.) Enables or disables the calling for @Remote. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alarm Setting *ENG 0: Enable @Remote calling...
  • Page 400 5. System Maintenance Not used Displays the pixel counter after replacement of 005 Pixel Count AF Replacement *CTL toner collection bottle. [0 to 200000 / - / 1 cm /step] Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 1 / 1 / 0.1 /step] Adjusts the toner amount between near full and full.
  • Page 401 Main SP Tables-3 [Manual New Unit Set] Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off. 3902 The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant parts of section 3 (Replacement and Adjustment). 001 Development Unit: Bk *ENG 002 Development Unit: C...

  • Page 402: Main Sp Tables-4

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-4 SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. 001 SScan Mag.Adjust *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 403 Main SP Tables-4 [Scanner Free Run] 4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode. Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT 001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON 002 Lamp: ON...
  • Page 404 5. System Maintenance [APS Operation Check] 4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (See "Input Check Table".) 001 APS Operation Check [APS Min Size] 4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 APS Min.
  • Page 405 Main SP Tables-4 [Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG 4400 Set the Mask for Original. These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning. 001 Book: Leading Edge 002 Book: Trailing Edge 003 Book: Left 004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] 005 ADF: Leading Edge 007 ADF: Left...

  • Page 406: Scanner Sp Mode

    5. System Maintenance 001 Copy 002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 003 Fax [Saturation Adjustment] 4440 Adjusts the level of saturation for copying. [0 to 5 / 3 / 1 /step] 0: High 1: Lowest 001 - *ENG 2: Lower...
  • Page 407 Main SP Tables-4 001 Copy: Bk: Text *ENG 002 Copy: C: Text *ENG 003 Copy: M: Text *ENG 004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step] 10: Darkest density 005 Copy: Bk: Photo *ENG 006 Copy: C: Photo *ENG 007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG...
  • Page 408 5. System Maintenance 005 Slave:K *ENG 006 Slave:C *ENG Reserved 007 Slave:M *ENG 008 Slave:Y *ENG 4550 [Scanner Appl.:Text/Chart] 4551 [Scanner Appl.: Text] 4552 [Scanner Appl.:Txt Dropout] 4553 [Scanner Appl.:Text/Photo] 4554 [Scanner Appl.: Photo] 4565 [Scanner Appl.: GrayScale] 4570 [Scan Appl.: Color: Text-Photo] 4571 [Scan Appl.: Color: Glossy Photo] 4572...
  • Page 409 Main SP Tables-4 4580 [FAX Appl.: Text/Chart] 4582 [FAX Appl.: Text/Photo] 4583 [FAX Appl.: Photo] [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step] MTF: 0 (Off), 1-15 (Strong) *ENG 0: MTF Off -005 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function) designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
  • Page 410 5. System Maintenance Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step] -006 Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images. Brightness: 1–255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step] -007 Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
  • Page 411 Main SP Tables-4 4806 [Carriage Move] Moves the carriage from the scanner home position. Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass. 001 - Therefore, do this SP when you transport the machine a long distance. 4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change] [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Selects the SBU test pattern.
  • Page 412 5. System Maintenance Bit0: TAURUS register Bit1: ORION register Bit2: LUPUS register Test1 Bit3 to 11: Not used Bit12: Ri20 Bit13 to 15: Not used 0: OK, 1: Error Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the BCU board and displays the result. Bit0: Image path from SBU to TAURUS Bit1: Image path from TAURUS to ORION Bit2: Image path from ORION to TAURUS...
  • Page 413 Main SP Tables-4 Selects the range level of Highlight correction. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 002 Range Selection *ENG 0: weakest skew correction, 9: strongest skew correction [Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.] 4994 Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF. [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] 0: Text priority 001 High Compression PDF...

  • Page 414: Main Sp Tables-5

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-5 SP5-XXX (Mode) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting Counter] Selects the counting method. 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
  • Page 415 Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Coverage Counter Display] 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display...
  • Page 416 5. System Maintenance 5066 [Parts PM Menu Display Setting] Not used [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display [Parts PM System Setting] 5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts. If the user service is selected, PM alart is displayed on the LCD.
  • Page 417 Main SP Tables-5 5113 [Optional Counter Type] This program specifies the counter type. 0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4) 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card Default Optional Counter *CTL Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card 8: Key counter + Vendor 9: Bar-code Printer This program specifies the external counter type.
  • Page 418 5. System Maintenance [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap) 5126 [F Size Original Setting] *ENG 1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio) 2: 8" x 13" (F) 001 Selects F size original setting. 5127 [APS Mode] *CTL...
  • Page 419 Main SP Tables-5 [Size Adjust] 5181 Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step] 001 Tray 1:1 *ENG 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 002 Tray 1: 2 *ENG 0: A3, 1: DLT...
  • Page 420 5. System Maintenance [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 014 Tray 4: 2 *ENG 0: A3, 1: DLT [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 015 Tray 4: 3 *ENG 0: B4, 1: LG [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 016 Tray 4: 4 *ENG...
  • Page 421 Main SP Tables-5 [Set Time] Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone. Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.) DOM: +540 (Tokyo) 5302 NA: -300 (New York) EU: + 60 (Paris) CH: +480 (Peking) TW: +480 (Taipei) AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
  • Page 422 5. System Maintenance Rule Set (Start) Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting. 1st and 2nd digits: The month.
  • Page 423 Main SP Tables-5 This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On). [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 005 Password Null Not Permit *CTL 0: Password NULL not permitted. 1: Password NULL permitted. 5413 [Lockout Setting] Switches on/off the lock on the local address book account.
  • Page 424 5. System Maintenance Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical. [0 to 1 / 0 /1] 001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL 0: Off 1: On Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and passwords. 002 Mitigation Time *CTL [0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min.]...
  • Page 425 Main SP Tables-5 Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are detected for MFP 001 Access Permissible Number *CTL features. [0 to 500 / 100 / 1] Sets the length of time for monitoring the frequency of access to MFP features.
  • Page 426 5. System Maintenance Color Security Setting *CTL Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the user authentication is "ON". 0: Enable (default), 1: Disable Bit0: B/W mode Bit1: Mono color mode Bit2: Two colors mode Bit3: Full color mode Bit4: Automatic color mode Bit5 to 7: Reserved...
  • Page 427 Main SP Tables-5 [Authentication Error Code] 5481 These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed. Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication failure occurs. 001 System Log Disp *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication...
  • Page 428 5. System Maintenance Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included). [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 0: Zero (Off) 1: Low (2.5K jams) 2: Medium (3K jams) 3: High (6K jams) [Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level.
  • Page 429 Main SP Tables-5 128 Interval :Others 132 Interval :A3 133 Interval :A4 134 Interval :A5 141 Interval :B4 [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] 142 Interval :B5 160 Interval :DLT 164 Interval :LG 166 Interval :LT 172 Interval :HLT 5508* [CC Call] *CTL...
  • Page 430 5. System Maintenance [SC/Alarm Setting] 5515 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs. 001 SC Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 002 Service Parts Near End Call...
  • Page 431 Main SP Tables-5 [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density...
  • Page 432 5. System Maintenance Resets all correction data for process control and all 001 All Clear software counters, and returns all modes and adjustments to their default values. 002 Engine [ENG] Clears the engine settings. Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control 003 SCS Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM update information.
  • Page 433 Main SP Tables-5 Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) 015 Clear UCS Setting settings. Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) 016 MIRS Setting settings. Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control 017 CCS Service) settings. 018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
  • Page 434 5. System Maintenance 5811 [Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number Display 002 Display *ENG Displays the machine serial number. 004 - Inputs the serial number. 5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting] Service *CTL Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s "Counter"...
  • Page 435 Main SP Tables-5 CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Start of the service 1: End of the service • NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to "2". Function Flag Enables or disables the remote service function.
  • Page 436 5. System Maintenance RFU (Remote Frimware Update) Timing Selects the RFU timing. [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] 0: RFU is executed whenever update request is received. 1: RFU is executed only when the machine is in the sleep mode. RCG –...
  • Page 437 Main SP Tables-5 Proxy Port Number This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up Embedded RC Gate-N. • This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. Proxy User Name This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
  • Page 438 5. System Maintenance CERT: Up State Displays the status of the certification update. The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly. The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated. The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update.
  • Page 439 Main SP Tables-5 CERT: Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued.
  • Page 440 5. System Maintenance Displays the common name of the @Remote certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are 090 CERT: Subject displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks (*) indicate that no @Remote certification exists. "000000___________" indicates "Common certification". Displays serial number for the @Remote certification. 091 CERT: Serial No.
  • Page 441 Main SP Tables-5 Local Phone Number Not used Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming Not used Access Point Not used Line Connecting Not used 173 Modem Serial Number Not used Retransmission Limit Not used FAX TX Priority Not used 200 Manual Polling Not used Regist: Status Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
  • Page 442 5. System Maintenance Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with SP5816-203. 0: Succeeded 1: Confirmation number error 2: Registration in progress 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error...
  • Page 443 Main SP Tables-5 Cause Code Meaning -11001 Chat parameter error Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error -11003 Unexpected error Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring -12002 device status. Operation Error, Incorrect Attempted registration without execution of an -12003 Setting inquiry and no previous registration. Attempted setting with illegal entries for -12004 certification and ID2.
  • Page 444 5. System Maintenance -2393 RCG device not managed -2394 Device not managed -2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal -2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal -2397 Incorrect ID2 format -2398 Incorrect request number format Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup. 209 Instl Clear NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this setting has been changed.
  • Page 445 Main SP Tables-5 Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility. 050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Enables or disables ECP Compatibility. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 052 ECP (Centro) •...
  • Page 446 5. System Maintenance Enables or disables the Web operation. 091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format: 145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address "Link Local Address"...
  • Page 447 Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web system. 237 Web shopping link visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 448 5. System Maintenance 001 HDD Formatting (ALL) 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) 005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only 006 HDD Formatting (User Info) if there is a hard disk error. 007 Mail RX Data 008 Mail TX Data 009 HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)
  • Page 449 Main SP Tables-5 076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4 5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB.
  • Page 450 5. System Maintenance 104 Primary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Sets the IP address for the secondary capture server. This is 111 Secondary srv IP address basically adjusted by the remote system. 112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 451 Main SP Tables-5 [1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step] Channel MAX *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11 Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.
  • Page 452 5. System Maintenance Selects the WEP key. [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary] 00: Key #1 011 WEP key Select *CTL 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 11: Key #4 (Reserved) Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
  • Page 453 Main SP Tables-5 001 Toner Name Setting: Black 002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan 003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow 004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta Specifies supply names. These appear on the screen when the user 007 OrgStamp *CTL presses the Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
  • Page 454 5. System Maintenance Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step] Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device.
  • Page 455 Main SP Tables-5 Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered. Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user) Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link Bit5 to 0: Not used Rapid Sending Control Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error.
  • Page 456 5. System Maintenance Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step] Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed by UCS. LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step] Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
  • Page 457 Main SP Tables-5 Displays the slot number where an address book data is in. [0 to 30 / - /1] 0: Unconfirmed 1: SD Slot 1 043 Addr Book Media 2: SD Slot 2 4: USB Flash ROM 20: HDD 30: Nothing Clears the local address book information, including the 047 Initialize Local Addr Book...
  • Page 458 5. System Maintenance Search Option This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book. Bit: Meaning 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters 1: Japan Only 2: Japan Only 3: Japan Only 4 to 7: Not Used Complexity Option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book.
  • Page 459 Main SP Tables-5 001 Rate for Copy Color 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 002 Rate for Copy B&W Text 2: 1/3x 003 Rate for Copy B&W Other 3: 1/4x 004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 005 Rate for Printer B&W Network Quality Default for JPEG Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
  • Page 460 5. System Maintenance Specifies the max size of the image data that the Repository: Download Image machine can download. Max. Size [1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step] 5849 [Installation Date] *CTL The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to 5849 1 Display "Installation Date"...
  • Page 461 Main SP Tables-5 5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on. Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
  • Page 462 5. System Maintenance Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by copier engine errors. 001 Engine SC Error [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step] 0: OFF, 1: ON Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated by GW controller errors.
  • Page 463 Main SP Tables-5 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time. 021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / –...
  • Page 464 5. System Maintenance Enables or disables the e-mail alert. 001 Report Validity *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enable, 1: Disable Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail. 005 Add Date Field *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / –...
  • Page 465 Main SP Tables-5 Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs. [0 or 1/ 0 / – ] 0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. 001 Reboot Setting *CTL If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not...
  • Page 466 5. System Maintenance [Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings 5885 Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor. 0: OFF, 1: ON Bit Meaning 0: Forbid all document server access (1) 1: Forbid user mode access (1) 2: Forbid print function (1) 020 Document Server ACC Ctrl *CTL 3: Forbid fax TX (1)
  • Page 467 Main SP Tables-5 [SD Get Counter] 5887 This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated. This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
  • Page 468 5. System Maintenance Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names should be registered again. After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
  • Page 469 Main SP Tables-5 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 002 On Board USB 0: Disable, 1: Enable 5987 [Mech. Counter Protection] This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed. 001 0: OFF / 1: ON If it is detected, SC610 occurs. [SP print mode] 5990 Prints out the SMC sheets.
  • Page 470 5. System Maintenance Turns on or off the fusing unit preceding mode. The machine turns on the fusing unit first by default after power-on or recovery from the energy save mode. If a customer does not want the fusing unit to rotate before sending a job to the machine, change this setting to "0".

  • Page 471: Main Sp Tables-6

    Main SP Tables-6 Main SP Tables-6 SP6-XXX (Peripherals) 6006 [ADF Adjustment] Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF. 001 S-to-S Registration 1st [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 002 S-to-S Registration 2nd *ENG 003 Leading Edge Registration [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear sides.
  • Page 472 5. System Maintenance [Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment 6010 Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals. 001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step] [Original Size Detection Priority] Original Size Detection Priority 6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
  • Page 473 Main SP Tables-6 [Punch Position Adjustment] 6102 Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction. 001 Leading Edge Adjustment [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.1mm/step] [Jogger Position Adjustment] 6103 Adjusts the jogger position 001 - [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1mm/step] [Punch Position Adjustment] 6104 Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.

  • Page 474: Main Sp Tables-7

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-7 SP7-XXX (Data Log) [Total SC Counter] 7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected. 001 - *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ] [SC History] Logs the SC codes detected. 7403 The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
  • Page 475 Main SP Tables-7 [Total Original Jam Counter] 7503 Displays the total number of original jams. 001 - *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step ] [Paper Jam Location] ON: On check, OFF: Off Check 7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected. NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
  • Page 476 5. System Maintenance 028 1-Bin Exit Sensor *CTL 051 SEF Sensor 1 *CTL 052 SEF Sensor 2 *CTL 053 Bank SEF Sensor 1 *CTL For details, p.693 "Jam 057 Regist Sensor *CTL Detection" 059 Fusing Exit Sensor *CTL 060 Exit Sensor *CTL 065 Duplex Exit Sensor *CTL...
  • Page 477 Main SP Tables-7 001 At Power On 003 Skew Correction: ON 004 Registration: ON For details, p.693 "Jam 005 Paper Exit: ON *CTL Detection" 053 Skew Correction: OFF 054 Registration: OFF 055 Paper Exit: OFF [Jam Count by Paper Size] 7506 Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
  • Page 478 5. System Maintenance [Plotter Jam History] 7507 Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams. 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 *CTL 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 [Original Jam History] 7508...
  • Page 479 Main SP Tables-7 001 PCU:Bk *CTL 002 PCU:M *CTL 003 PCU:C *CTL 004 PCU:Y *CTL 005 Dev Unit:Bk *CTL 006 Dev Unit:M *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 007 Dev Unit:C *CTL 0: No (Not PM maintenance) 1: Yes (PM maintenance) 008 Dev Unit:Y *CTL 009 Image Transfer Belt...
  • Page 480 5. System Maintenance 002 Page: PCU: Bk 003 Page: PCU: C 004 Page: PCU: M 005 Page: PCU: Y 006 Page: Development Unit: Bk 007 Page: Development Unit: C 008 Page: Development Unit: M 009 Page: Development Unit: Y 010 Page: Developer: Bk 011 Page: Developer: C 012 Page: Developer: M 013 Page: Developer: Y...
  • Page 481 Main SP Tables-7 032 Rotation: PCU: C 033 Rotation: PCU: M 034 Rotation: PCU: Y 035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk 036 Rotation: Development Unit: C 037 Rotation: Development Unit: M 038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y 039 Rotation: Developer: Bk 040 Rotation: Developer: C 041 Rotation: Developer: M 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation:ITB Unit...
  • Page 482 5. System Maintenance [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step] Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected -061 to lifetime has been used up. -078 The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints.
  • Page 483 Main SP Tables-7 079 Amt(%):ITB T-Collect Bottle 080 Amt(%):PCU T-Collect Bottle Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current printouts ÷ Target printouts) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. -091 to The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions.
  • Page 484 5. System Maintenance [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear 7804 (Unit, [Color]) Clears the PM counter. Press the Enter key after the machine asks "Execute?", which will store the PM counter value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of the current PM counter (SP7-803) to "0".
  • Page 485 Main SP Tables-7 022 PTR Unit 023 ITB T-Collect Bottle 024 PCU T-Collect Bottle 100 All [SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7807 Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams. 001 - *CTL 7826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only 001 Error Total *CTL 002 Error Staple *CTL...
  • Page 486 5. System Maintenance [DF Glass Dust Check] Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on the scanning 7852 glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting is done only if SP4-020-1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on. 001 Dust Detection Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1 /step]...
  • Page 487 Main SP Tables-7 018 PTR Unit *CTL 019 ITB T-Collect Bottle *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 020 PCU T-Collect Bottle *CTL [Coverage Range] Sets the color coverage threshold. Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100 There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3 •...
  • Page 488 5. System Maintenance 006 Page: Development Unit: C 007 Page: Development Unit: M 008 Page: Development Unit: Y 009 Page: Developer: Bk 010 Page: Developer: C 011 Page: Developer: M 012 Page: Developer: Y 013 Page: ITB Unit 014 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit 015 Page: Fusing Unit 016 Page: Fusing Pad 017 Page: Fusing Belt...
  • Page 489 Main SP Tables-7 040 Rotation: Developer: C 041 Rotation: Developer: M 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation: ITB Unit 044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Pad 047 Rotation: Fusing Belt 048 Rotation: PTR Unit 049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle 050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge.
  • Page 490 5. System Maintenance 074 Rotation %: ITB Cleaning Unit 075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit 076 Rotation %: Fusing Pad 077 Rotation %: Fusing Belt 078 Rotation %: PTR Unit 079 Rotation %:ITB T-Collect Bottle 080 Rotation %:PCU T-Collect Bottle Displays the value given by the following formula: -091 to (Current count ÷...
  • Page 491 Main SP Tables-7 106 Page (%): Fusing Pad 107 Page (%): Fusing Belt 108 Page (%): PTR Unit [Toner Bottle Bk] 7931 Displays the toner bottle information for Bk. 001 Machine Serial ID *ENG 002 Cartridge Ver *EGN 003 Brand ID *EGN 004 Area ID *EGN...
  • Page 492 5. System Maintenance 013 EDP Code *EGN 014 End History *EGN 015 Refill Information *EGN 016 Attachment: Total Counter *EGN 017 Attachment: Color Counter *EGN 018 End: Total Counter *EGN 019 End: Color Counter *EGN 020 Attachment Date *EGN 021 End Date *EGN [Toner Bottle M] 7932...
  • Page 493 Main SP Tables-7 013 EDP Code *EGN 014 End History *EGN 015 Refill Information *EGN 016 Attachment: Total Counter *EGN 017 Attachment: Color Counter *EGN 018 End: Total Counter *EGN 019 End: Color Counter *EGN 020 Attachment Date *EGN 021 End Date [Toner Bottle C] 7933 Displays the toner bottle information for C.
  • Page 494 5. System Maintenance 013 EDP Code *EGN 014 End History *EGN 015 Refill Information *EGN 016 Attachment: Total Counter *EGN 017 Attachment: Color Counter *EGN 018 End: Total Counter *EGN 019 End: Color Counter *EGN 020 Attachment Date *EGN 021 End Date *EGN [Toner Bottle Y] 7934...
  • Page 495 Main SP Tables-7 011 Serial No. *EGN 012 Toner Remaining *EGN 013 EDP Code *EGN 014 End History *EGN 015 Refill Information *EGN 016 Attachment: Total Counter *EGN 017 Attachment: Color Counter *EGN 018 End: Total Counter *EGN 019 End: Color Counter *EGN 020 Attachment Date *EGN...
  • Page 496 5. System Maintenance 013 Serial No. 014 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 4 for Bk. 015 Attachment: Total Counter 016 Refill Information 017 Serial No. 018 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 5 for Bk. 019 Attachment: Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7936...
  • Page 497 Main SP Tables-7 017 Serial No. 018 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 5 for M. 019 Attachment: Total Counter 020 Refill Information 7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 1 for C.
  • Page 498 5. System Maintenance 7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 1 for Y. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 005 Serial No. 006 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle information log *ENG 2 for Y.
  • Page 499 Main SP Tables-7 001 ITB Unit *ENG 002 ITB Cleaning Unit *EGN 003 PTR Unit *EGN 004 Fusing Unit *EGN 005 Fusing Pad *EGN 006 Fusing Belt *EGN 013 PCU: Bk *EGN 014 PCU: C *EGN 015 PCU: M *EGN 016 PCU: Y *EGN 017 Development Unit:Bk...
  • Page 500 5. System Maintenance 005 Page: Development Unit: Bk 006 Page: Development Unit: C 007 Page: Development Unit: M 008 Page: Development Unit: Y 009 Page: Developer: Bk 010 Page: Developer: C 011 Page: Developer: M 012 Page: Developer: Y 013 Page: ITB Unit 014 Page: ITB Cleaning Unit 015 Page: Fusing Unit 016 Page: Fusing Pad...
  • Page 501 Main SP Tables-7 043 Rotation: ITB Unit 044 Rotation: ITB Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Fusing Pad 047 Rotation: Fusing Belt 048 Rotation:PTR Unit 049 Rotation:ITB T-Collect Bottle 050 Rotation:PCU T-Collect Bottle [PM Yield Setting] 7952 Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit. [0 to 999999999 / 172177000 / 1000 mm/ 001 Rotation: ITB Unit *EGN...
  • Page 502 5. System Maintenance 016 Page: PTR Unit *EGN [0 to 999999 / 240000 / 1 sheet/step] 021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk *EGN 022 Day Threshold: PCU: C *EGN 023 Day Threshold: PCU: M *EGN 024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y *EGN Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each PM unit.
  • Page 503 Main SP Tables-7 038 Rotation: PCU: Bk *EGN 039 Rotation: PCU: C [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 040 Rotation: PCU: M 041 Rotation: PCU: Y Rotation: Development Unit: *EGN Rotation: Development Unit: *EGN [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Rotation: Development Unit: *EGN Rotation: Development Unit:...
  • Page 504 5. System Maintenance 058 Page: Developer: Bk 059 Page: Developer: C *EGN [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] 060 Page: Developer: M 061 Page: Developer: Y 062 Day Threshold:PTR Unit Adjusts the threshold day of the near end for each PM unit.
  • Page 505 Main SP Tables-7 011 15<=T<25: 55<=H<80 012 15<=T<25: 80<=H<=100 013 25<=T<30: 0<=H<30 014 25<=T<30: 30<=H<55 015 25<=T<30: 55<=H<80 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step] 016 25<=T<30: 80<=H<=100 017 30<=T: 0<=H<30 018 30<=T: 30<=H<55 019 30<=T: 55<=H<80 020 30<=T: 80<=H<=100 [Operation Env.

  • Page 506: Main Sp Tables-8

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-8 Input and Output Check Tables Input Check Table When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Bit No.
  • Page 507 Main SP Tables-8 5803 15 Zero Cross Not detected Detected 5803 16 Regist Sensor Paper detected No paper detected 5803 17 Drum Phase Sn:Bk Actuator not detected Actuator detected 5803 18 Drum Phase Sn:Color Actuator not detected Actuator detected 5803 19 Inverter Sensor Inverter gate open Inverter gate close 5803 20 Duplex Exit Sensor...
  • Page 508 5. System Maintenance 5803 39 ITB T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Not set 5803 40 PCU T-Collect Bttl:Set SW Not set 5803 41 PCU T-Collect Bttl Full Sn Full Not full 5803 42 Vertical Transport 1 Sn Paper detected No paper detected 5803 43 Vertical Transport 2 Sn Paper detected No paper detected...
  • Page 509 Main SP Tables-8 5803 75 Shift Tray:Half Turn Sn Not HP 5803 76 Shift Tray Set Detection Not set 5803 77 1T PFU:Size Sensors See "Table 4". 5803 78 1T PFU:Paper Lift Sn Not upper limit Upper limit 5803 79 1T PFU:Paper Height Sn 5803 80 1T PFU:Right Cover SW Open Close...
  • Page 510 5. System Maintenance 11" x 17" SEF* A3 SEF* (A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF) 8.5" x 14" SEF B4 SEF (B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF) A4 SEF A4 SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF B5 SEF B5 SEF 11"...
  • Page 511 Main SP Tables-8 By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length Sensor EU/ASIA bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 LT/LG SEF* A5 LEF DLT SEF A3 SEF LT LEF A4 LEF *1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001. Table 3: APS Original Size Detection: Original Size Width Sensor Length Sensor...
  • Page 512 5. System Maintenance 11" x 17" SEF* A3 SEF* (A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF) 8.5" x 14" SEF B4 SEF (B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF) A4 SEF A4 SEF B5 SEF B5 SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 11"...
  • Page 513 Main SP Tables-8 6007 5 Original Width Sn:M Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 6 Original Width Sn:L Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 7 Original Width Sn:LL Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 9 Original Set Sn Paper not detected Paper detected 6007 10 Trailing Edge Sn Paper not detected...
  • Page 514 5. System Maintenance 6120 13 Punch Unit:Area Detect2 See "Table 5" below. 6120 14 Punch Unit:Area Detect1 6120 15 Paper Stack Sensor 2 Not HP 6120 16 Paper Stack Sensor 1 Not HP 6120 17 Punch Position Sensor Not HP 6120 18 Paper Width Sensor:A3 Paper not detected Paper detected...
  • Page 515 Main SP Tables-8 6120-014 Punch Unit:Area Detect2 Output Check Table Copier 5804 Display Description 5804 1 Paper Feed M1:CW:190mm/s 5804 2 Paper Feed M1:CW:120mm/s 5804 3 Paper Feed M1:CW:60mm/s 5804 4 P-Feed M1:CW:60mm/s:Thick 5804 5 Paper Feed M1:CCW:190mm/s 5804 6 Paper Feed M1:CCW:120mm/s 5804 7 Paper Feed M1:CCW:60mm/s 5804 8 P-Feed M1:CCW:60mm/s:Thick 5804 9 Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/s...
  • Page 516 5. System Maintenance 5804 22 Bypass M:CCW:120mm/s 5804 23 Bypass M:CCW:60mm/s 5804 24 Registration M:120mm/s 5804 25 Registration M:60mm/s 5804 26 Regist M:60mm/s:Thick 5804 27 Inverter M:CW:280mm/s 5804 29 Inverter M:CW:120mm/s 5804 31 Inverter M:CW:60mm/s 5804 33 Inverter M:280mm/s 5804 35 Inverter M:120mm/s 5804 37 Inverter M:60mm/s 5804 39 Duplex Exit M:280mm/s 5804 40 Duplex Exit M:120mm/s...
  • Page 517 Main SP Tables-8 5804 54 Fusing/P-Exit M:60mm/s 5804 55 Electrical FAN:H 5804 56 Electrical FAN:L 5804 57 Fusing Fan:H 5804 58 Fusing Fan:L 5804 59 Dev. Front FAN:H 5804 60 Dev. Front FAN:L 5804 61 Dev. Rear FAN:H 5804 62 Dev. Rear FAN:L 5804 63 Fusing Exit Fan:H 5804 64 Fusing Exit Fan:L 5804 65 LD Unit Fan:H...
  • Page 518 5. System Maintenance 5804 82 PWM:Potential Sn:M 5804 83 PWM:Potential Sn:Y 5804 84 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:H 5804 85 HVPS:Charge AC:Bk:L 5804 86 HVPS:Charge AC:C:H 5804 87 HVPS:Charge AC:C:L 5804 88 HVPS:Charge AC:M:H 5804 89 HVPS:Charge AC:M:L 5804 90 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:H 5804 91 HVPS:Charge AC:Y:L 5804 92 HVPS:Charge DC:Bk 5804 93 HVPS:Charge DC:C 5804 94 HVPS:Charge DC:M...
  • Page 519 Main SP Tables-8 5804 108 MUSIC Sensor:F:PWM 5804 109 Reserve Fan:H 5804 110 Reserve Fan:LOCK 5804 111 Toner End Sn Power 5804 120 R-Tray M:280mm/s 5804 121 R-Tray M:120mm/s 5804 122 R-Tray SOL 5804 123 Shift Motor 5804 124 1T PFU:Tray Lift M 5804 125 1T PFU:Paper Feed M 5804 126 1T PFU:Paper Feed CL 5804 127 2T PFU:Relay CL...
  • Page 520 5. System Maintenance 5804 199 RFID COM ON: Y 5804 202 Scanner Lamp 5804 210 Polygon Motor 5804 216 LD1: Bk 5804 218 LD1: M 5804 220 LD1: C 5804 222 LD1: Y Internal Finisher (D429) 6121 Description Description 6121 1 Transport Motor 6121 2 Front Jogger Motor 6121 3 Rear Jogger Motor 6121 4 Stapler Slide Motor...
  • Page 521 Main SP Tables-8 ARDF (D366) 6008 Display Description 6008 3 Feed Motor: Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation 6008 4 Feed Motor: Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation 6008 5 Transport Motor: Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 6 Transport Motor: Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 9 Feed Clutch 6008 10 Pick-up Solenoid 6008 11 Junction Gate Solenoid...

  • Page 522: Main Sp Tables-9

    5. System Maintenance Main SP Tables-9 Printer Service Mode SP1-XXX (Service Mode) 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur. bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable...
  • Page 523 Main SP Tables-9 002 Bit Switch 2 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured. •...
  • Page 524 5. System Maintenance 003 Bit Switch 3 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"...
  • Page 525 Main SP Tables-9 Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and "Punch Disable Enable Type" buttons on the operation panel. If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and Punch Type bit 0 from the operation panel. The available types will depend on the device and configured options.
  • Page 526 5. System Maintenance bit 7 1: Enable Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable (Duplex) 1001 Bit Switch 006 Bit Switch 6 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 007 Bit Switch 7 Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) and the last bit 0 page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the duplex unit.
  • Page 527 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 005 Bit Switch 9 "Disabled "Enabled PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted via (Immediatel USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (10 seconds)" y)" bit 0 To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't necessarily mean that the job can't be printed.
  • Page 528 5. System Maintenance 1004 [Print Summary] Print Summary 1004 1 Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings). 1005 [Display Version] Disp. Version 1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware. 1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On Enables and disables the document server.
  • Page 529 Main SP Tables-9 [Gamma Adjustment] 1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection" menu. 1104 1 Black: Highlight 1104 2 Black: Shadow 1104 3 Black: Middle 1104 4 Black: IDmax *CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ] 1104 21 Cyan: Highlight 1104 22 Cyan: Shadow 1104 23 Cyan: Middle...

  • Page 530: Scanner Sp Mode

    5. System Maintenance 1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ] Scanner SP Mode SP1-xxx (System and Others) 1001 [Scan Nv Version] 1001 5 - *CTL [Compression Type] 1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. [1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ] 1004 1 Compression Type *CTL...
  • Page 531 Main SP Tables-9 Selects the original counter display. 1011 1 0: Displays remaining memory for the original scanning. 1: Displays original counter. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 1012 [UserInfo release] *CTL 0: No, 1: Yes Clear the following settings: 1012 1 Address, Sender, Text / Subject, Filename [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]...

  • Page 532: Firmware Update

    5. System Maintenance Firmware Update To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the left rear side of the controller box.

  • Page 533: Before You Begin

    Firmware Update Page description language PS/ PDF PS3 SD card PS3/ PDF (PostScript3) PictBridge PictBridge control PictBridge SD card PctBrgd ARDF ARDF control ARDF Finisher (D429) Finisher control Finisher (D429) Finisher Java VM SDK application Java VM SD card Data Overwrite Security application Security SD card HDD Format Option...

  • Page 534: Updating Firmware

    • If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card. • If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D104" folder onto the card. If the card already contains folders up to "D104", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. D104xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
  • Page 535 Firmware Update • Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one. 9. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update. • The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch "OpPanel". The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals when the LCDC firmware is updating.

  • Page 536: Updating The Lcdc For The Operation Panel

    5. System Maintenance Recovery after Power Loss If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated successfully.

  • Page 537: Handling Firmware Update Errors

    Firmware Update 12. Press the "Exit" button. 13. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card from SD slot 2 14. Install the Java VM card in SD slot 2. 15. Attach the SD slot cover ( x 1).

  • Page 538: Java Vm Updating Procedure

    5. System Maintenance SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is Module mismatch – Module on for another machine. Acquire correct update data then SD card is not for this machine install again. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is Cannot write module –...

  • Page 539: App2Me Updating Procedure

    Firmware Update 7. "Press any key to continue…" is appeared, then press "Enter" key again. The updating to the SD card starts. 8. "Press any key to continue…" is appeared again, then press "Enter" key. The command prompt screen is disappeared automatically if the updating is successful. 9.

  • Page 540: Brower Unit Updating Procedure

    5. System Maintenance 10. Copy the App2Me Provider folder into the specified path for the VM card. The path is: "SD_Card Drive\ sdk\dsdk\dist\337051920" 11. Turn the SD card label face to the rear of the machine, and then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower slot) until you hear a click.
  • Page 541 Firmware Update 3. Turn the SD-card label face of the latest version Brower Unit [A] to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 until you hear a click. 4. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 5.

  • Page 542: Installing Another Language

    5. System Maintenance Installing Another Language Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation panel.
  • Page 543 Installing Another Language 8. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language. • If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse. •...
  • Page 544 5. System Maintenance 10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download. Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading. The following occur at the time the language is downloading: •...

  • Page 545: Reboot/System Setting Reset

    Reboot/System Setting Reset Reboot/System Setting Reset Software Reset You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures: 1. Turn the main power switch off and on. 2. Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons.
  • Page 546 5. System Maintenance • You must press first. 3. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings. 4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.

  • Page 547: Controller Self-Diagnostics

    Controller Self-Diagnostics Controller Self-Diagnostics Overview There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller. 1. Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics just after the power has been turned on. 2. SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on or during operation. The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.
  • Page 548 5. System Maintenance...

  • Page 549: Sd Card Appli Move

    SD Card Appli Move SD Card Appli Move Overview The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you to copy application programs from one SD card to another SD card. Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. However, more than two optional applications are supplied for this machine.

  • Page 550: Move Exec

    5. System Maintenance 4. Remove the inner cover ( p.172 "Inner Cover"). 5. Keep the SD card in the place [A] inside the inner cover after you have copied the application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons: •...

  • Page 551: Undo Exec

    SD Card Appli Move 11. Check that the application programs run normally. Undo Exec The menu “Undo Exec” (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).

  • Page 552: Downloading Stamp Data

    5. System Maintenance Downloading Stamp Data The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times: • After the hard disks have been replaced. The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.

  • Page 553: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    NVRAM Data Upload/Download NVRAM Data Upload/Download Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card. • This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. •...
  • Page 554 5. System Maintenance 2. Remove the SD slot cover (s x 1). 3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2. 4. Switch the copier main power switch on. 5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key. •...

  • Page 555: Address Book Upload/Download

    Address Book Upload/Download Address Book Upload/Download Information List The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information • Registration No. • Select Title • User Code • Folder • E-mail • Local Authentication • Protection Code • Folder Authentication •...

  • Page 556: Upload

    5. System Maintenance Upload 1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine. 2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1). 3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2. 4.

  • Page 557: Using The Debug Log

    Using the Debug Log Using the Debug Log Overview This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
  • Page 558 5. System Maintenance 4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press . •...
  • Page 559 Using the Debug Log Example 2: To Specify an SC Code Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys. Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670. • For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4. "Troubleshooting". 6.
  • Page 560 5. System Maintenance The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules.) 4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10 Key No. Copy Printer Scanner 2222 (SCS) 14000 (SRM) 256 (IMH) 1000 (ECS) 1025 (MCS) 4848 (COPY)

  • Page 561: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    SD card. 3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.

  • Page 562: Card Save Function

    5. System Maintenance Card Save Function Overview Card Save: • The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 563 Card Save Function 6. Select “Bit Switch 1 Settings” and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the “#” button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card Save option will appear in the “List/Test Print”...
  • Page 564 5. System Maintenance 10. Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New). 11. Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu. 12. Press the “Printer” button. 13.
  • Page 565 Card Save Function 15. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was successful. 16. Press “Offline” and then the “Clear/Stop” button to exit Card Save mode. 17.
  • Page 566 5. System Maintenance...

  • Page 567: Troubleshooting

    6. Troubleshooting SC Tables Service Call Conditions Summary The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.
  • Page 568 6. Troubleshooting • If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors. SC Code Classification The table shows the classification of the SC codes: Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 100 - Scanner Scanning...
  • Page 569 SC Tables Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 530 - Fan motor 540 - Fusing Paper feed / Fusing 560 - Others 570 - Unique for a specific model 600 - Electrical counters 620 - Mechanical counters 630 - Account control Communication 640 -...

  • Page 570: Sc1Xx: Scanning

    6. Troubleshooting SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Exposure lamp error The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading plate. • Exposure lamp defective • Lamp stabilizer defective • Exposure lamp connector defective •...
  • Page 571 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the “ON” condition during operation. • Scanner motor driver defective • Scanner motor defective • Harness between BCU and scanner motor disconnected •...
  • Page 572 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) White level detection error The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control. • Dirty exposure glass or optics section • SBU board defective • Exposure lamp defective •...
  • Page 573 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the IPU is detected. • Defective IPU or BCU • Defective connection between IPU (or BCU ) and SBU -001 1. Check the connection between IPU and SBU. 2.

  • Page 574: Sc 2Xx: Exposure

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Serial Number Mismatch Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code. • NVRAM defective • BCU replaced without original NVRAM 1. Reinstall the original NVRAM in the replaced BCU. 2.
  • Page 575 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3 seconds after the polygon motor switches off. • Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board •...
  • Page 576 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB [K], [Y], is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
  • Page 577 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE ON error: Y The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for start position [Y]. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE OFF error: Y...
  • Page 578 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE ON error: C The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment) for start position [C]. See SC 230 for troubleshooting details. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE OFF error: C...

  • Page 579: Sc3Xx: Image Processing - 1

    SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Line position adjustment (MUSIC) error Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times. • Pattern sampling error ( insufficient image density ) • Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment • Defective image transfer belt unit •...
  • Page 580 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Color development motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on. • Color development motor slip due to an increase in the torque caused by connected components.
  • Page 581 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below the specified value with SP3020-004 (default: 0.5V) ten counts.
  • Page 582 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SC is issued only if one of followings is satisfied. • During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with SP3238-001 to -004 (default: 2.7V) ±...
  • Page 583 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor: K for 2 seconds after the drum/development motor: K turned on. • Overload on the drum/development motor: K • Defective drum/development motor: K •...

  • Page 584: Sc4Xx: Image Processing - 2

    6. Troubleshooting SC4xx: Image Processing - 2 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ID sensor adjustment error When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC400". The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is more than the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3324-005 or less than the value (default: 3.5V) specified with SP3324-006.
  • Page 585 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ITB unit motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on. • Motor overload • Defective ITB unit motor •...
  • Page 586 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ITB unit error The machine detects the encoder sensor error. • Disconnect or defective harness • Defective ITB rotation sensor • ITB unit installation error • Defective ITB unit motor • ITB unit motor overload 1.
  • Page 587 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) High voltage power: Drum/ development bias output error An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or development. • High voltage leak • Broken harness • Defective drum unit or development unit •...

  • Page 588: Sc5Xx: Paper Feed And Fusing

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) PCDU toner collection motor error The machine detects that the PCDU toner collection bottle is not set for one second when the PCDU toner collection motor is turned off. • PCDU toner collection bottle motor damaged •...
  • Page 589 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper tray feed motor lock (optional Paper Tray Unit) A motor lock signal is not detected for more than 1.5 s at power-on or the lock signal is not detected for more than 1.0 s during rotation. •...
  • Page 590 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check the operation of the by-pass motor with SP5804-023. No operation: 1. Check the harness connection of the by-pass tray and duplex unit. 2. Replace the by-pass motor. Operation: Check the operation of the by-pass HP sensor with SP5803-048 while the by-pass motor is rotating.
  • Page 591 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Laser unit fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected. • Defective laser unit fan • Disconnected or defective harness •...
  • Page 592 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing rear fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected. • Defective fusing rear fan • Disconnected or defective harness •...
  • Page 593 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Junction gate solenoid fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected. • Defective junction gate solenoid fan • Disconnected or defective harness •...
  • Page 594 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error 1 • The heating roller temperature does not reach 50°C for 4 seconds after the heating lamp on. • The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature for 43 seconds after the fusing unit has rotated.
  • Page 595 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (hardware error) During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller temperature reaches 250°C. • Defective PSU • Defective BCU • Defective fusing control system 1.
  • Page 596 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross error • The zero cross signal is detected for 0.05 seconds three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power. • The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
  • Page 597 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error 2 • The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature for 65 seconds after the fusing unit has rotated. • The heating roller temperature does not reach 100°C for 25 seconds in the low temperature condition after the heating lamp on.
  • Page 598 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller lamp consecutive full power 2 When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the pressure roller-fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 130 seconds or more. •...
  • Page 599 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermister error 3 The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (center) does not reach 0°C for 45 seconds. • Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor (center) • Defective pressure roller thermistor (center) 1.
  • Page 600 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermister error 4 The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (end) does not reach 0 °C for 45 seconds. • Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor (end) • Defective pressure roller thermistor (end) 1.

  • Page 601: Sc6Xx: Device Communication

    SC Tables SC6xx: Device Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Mechanical counter error: K Mechanical counter error: FC This SC is only for NA models. The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987-001 is set to "1". •...
  • Page 602 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) While the BCU communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is displayed if one of following conditions occurs. • The BCU receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
  • Page 603 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 2 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms. • Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged •...
  • Page 604 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Expanded authentication module error There is no expanded authentication module in the machine. The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken. There is no DESS module in the machine. •...
  • Page 605 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Authentication error The authentication for the RCG-M fails at a dial up connection. • Incorrect SP settings -001 • Disconnected telephone line • Disconnected modem board Disconnected Local Area Network card Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password (SP5816-157).
  • Page 606 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) NVRAM error Retry of NVRAM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the NVRAM error. • Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Engine start up error The ready signal from the engine board is not detected.
  • Page 607 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup After powering on the machine, the communication circuit between the controller and the operation panel is not opened, or communication with controller is interrupted after a normal startup. •...
  • Page 608 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has detected the memory chip communication error. • Damaged memory chip data • Disconnected inter face •...
  • Page 609 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Memory address command error The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the controller for the prescribed time after the paper has reached the registration sensor. • Harness disconnection at BCU •...

  • Page 610: Sc7Xx: Peripherals

    6. Troubleshooting SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Shift tray motor error The shift tray HP sensor does not activate within 1.86 seconds after the shift tray motor starts to move at power on or copying. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 611 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher stapler movement motor error • Motor overload • Loose connection of the stapler unit HP sensor • Loose connection of the stapler unit movement motor • Defective stapler unit HP sensor •...
  • Page 612 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher punch motor error The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the punch motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 613 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher: Paper edge detection sensor error The machine does not detect correct voltage from the paper edge detection sensor. • Defective connector • Defective paper edge detection sensor. • Defective DA or AD converter. 1.
  • Page 614 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The machine does not detect a correct signal from the front jogger fence HP sensor at power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. •...
  • Page 615 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) The machine does not detect a correct signal from the pick-up roller HP sensor at power-on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. •...

  • Page 616: Sc8Xx: Overall System

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Front Fan error The machine detects the fan lock signal (ON) consecutively 200 ms. • Front fan damaged • Disconnect or defective the harness • Front fan overload 1. Check or replace the harness. 2.
  • Page 617 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Monitor Error This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel, or root system files from the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
  • Page 618 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 1. Turn the main switch off and on. 2. Reinstall the controller system firmware. 3. Replace the controller. When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure, the following information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a technical support center.
  • Page 619 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnosis error: ASIC The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU timer. If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range, this SC code is displayed. •...
  • Page 620 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Loose connection • Defective HDD • Defective controller 1. Check that the HDD is correctly connected to the controller. 2. Replace the HDD. 3. Replace the controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error: NIB [XXXX]: Detailed error code MAC address check sum error...
  • Page 621 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) [1401] Self-diagnosis error: Standard NVRAM The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed or detects that the NVRAM is defective. • Loose connection • Defective standard NVRAM • Defective controller 1. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly inserted into the socket. 2.
  • Page 622 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Verification error Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM). • Loose connection • Defective SDRAM DIMM [0201] • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. 2.
  • Page 623 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) • Not specified RAM DIMM installed • Defective RAM DIMM 1. Replace the RAM DIMM. 2. Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC •...
  • Page 624 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) A verify error occurred when setting data is read from the clock generator on the controller. • Defective clock generator [2701] • Defective controller board Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) USB NAND Flash ROM error The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.
  • Page 625 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Wireless LAN card not detected The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is established, though the wireless LAN board is detected. • Loose connection Check the connection. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card not detected The wireless LAN/Bluetooth card is not detected after communication is established, but the wireless LAN board is detected.
  • Page 626 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 1 A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit. Encryption key acquisition error: The controller fails to get a new encryption key. •...
  • Page 627 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Encryption unit error 2 A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD encryption unit. HDD check error: The HDD is not correctly installed. •...
  • Page 628 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Reboot error The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD. • Loose connection • Defective cables • Defective HDD • Defective controller 1.
  • Page 629 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: CRC error While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission fails. • Defective HDD Replace the HDD. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Access error An error is detected while operating the HDD.
  • Page 630 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card access error • -13 to -3: File system error • Other number: Device error An error report is sent from the SD card reader. • An error is detected in the SD card. 1.
  • Page 631 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD mail data error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization. • Defective HDD • Power failure during an access to the HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on. 2.
  • Page 632 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Delete All error 2: Data area An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (D362). • The logical format for the HDD fails. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
  • Page 633 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Log Data Error 5 • Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine -005 1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD. 2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 99 -099 •...

  • Page 634: Sc9Xx: Miscellaneous

    6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) File format converter error The file format converter does not respond. • Defective file format converter Replace the file format converter. SC9xx: Miscellaneous Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Electric counter error Abnormal data in the counters.
  • Page 635 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Printer font error A necessary font is not found in the SD card. • A necessary font is not found in the SD card. • The SD card data is corrupted. Check that the SD card has the correct data.
  • Page 636 6. Troubleshooting Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Undefined error Defective software program • An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred Print the "Logging Data" with SP5990-004 and then check the SP7990. If 498-Engine is found in the SP7990; 1.
  • Page 637 SC Tables Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Application function selection error • The application selected by the operation panel key does not start or ends abnormally. • Software (including the software configuration) defective • An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed •...
  • Page 638 6. Troubleshooting • SMC - All (SP5-990-001) • SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004) • Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs • All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.) •...

  • Page 639: Process Control Error Conditions

    Process Control Error Conditions Process Control Error Conditions Developer Initialization Result Displayed number shows results of each developer initialization result. 0000 = YMCK SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully Developer initialization is completed successfully completed. • A cover was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization.

  • Page 640: Process Control Self-Check Result

    6. Troubleshooting Process Control Self-Check Result Displayed number shows results of each Process Control Self-Check. 00000000 = YYMMCCKK SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Self-check Result) No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action Successfully Process control self-check completed successfully completed. • Defective development unit Vt maximum error and an image is faint: 1.
  • Page 641 Process Control Error Conditions No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action • ID sensor pattern density is too high. Gamma error: Gamma is out of range. • Hardware defective. Maximum 5.0 < Gamma Same as 53 • ID sensor pattern density is too low. Gamma is out of range.

  • Page 642: Line Position Adjustment Result

    6. Troubleshooting No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action • Dirty ID sensors (toner, dust, or foreign material) • Dirty image transfer belt • Scratched image transfer belt • Defective ID sensors • Poor connection • Defective BCU ID sensor Vsg cannot be adjustment adjusted within 4.0 1.
  • Page 643 Process Control Error Conditions Result Description Note Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been done, successfully Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for line position See Note patterns adjustment. Fewer lines on the The patterns, which ID sensors have detected, are not pattern than the See Note enough for line position adjustment.

  • Page 644: Troubleshooting Guide

    6. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guide Image Quality The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on this product.
  • Page 645 Troubleshooting Guide...

  • Page 646: Line Position Adjustment

    6. Troubleshooting Line Position Adjustment When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows. • Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment. Test 1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment). 2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed successfully, 1: Not completed).
  • Page 647 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective image processing unit • Low density of test pattern • Defective controller White image, Abnormal image, Low 1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit. density 2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
  • Page 648 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure • Defective ID sensor at center • Deformed center area on the image transfer belt The main scan registration is shifted by • Defective BCU more than ±0.66 mm, but only at the 1.
  • Page 649 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure White image, Abnormal image, • Defective image processing unit Low density • Low density of test pattern • Defective BCU 1. Replace the high voltage power supply unit. 2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
  • Page 650 6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y • No defective component are shifted by more than ±1.4mm from • Defective image transfer belt the sub scan registration of K. • Defective drive units •...
  • Page 651 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The main scan registration of K is • Abnormal SP setting value of main scan: K shifted. Adjust the value with SP2-101-001. The main scan length of K is shifted. • Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length detection: Adjust the value with SP2-102-001 and -003.

  • Page 652: Image Problems At Regular Intervals

    6. Troubleshooting Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y • Defective image transfer belt are shifted. • Defective drive units • Defective ID sensor • Defective BCU • Incorrect SP value 1. Replace the image transfer belt. 2.

  • Page 653: Sub-Scan Magnification Error

    Troubleshooting Guide • Development roller: 32 mm • PTR (Paper Transfer Roller): 75.0 mm • Drum: 94.2 mm • Fusing belt: 157.1 mm Sub-scan Magnification Error If a sub-scan magnification error of an image occurs on an output, follow the procedure below to adjust the sub-scan magnification.
  • Page 654 6. Troubleshooting • If one of the settings of SP1-803-004 to 006 is "1" (error), return to step 1 and then input a value which is closer to "0" compared with the previously input value. • For example, if "+0.9" is input in the settings of SP1-803-001 to 003 and an error occurs, input "+0.8"...
  • Page 655 Troubleshooting Guide SP No. Max. Min. Title SP1-801-020 By-pass:120 (0.3 default) SP1-801-022 Inverter:CW120 (0 default) SP1-801-024 Inverter:CCW120 (0 default) SP1-801-026 Duplex Entrance:120 (0.3 default) SP1-801-028 Duplex Exit:120 (0.3 default) 2. An error ("1") occurs in SP1-803-005. [Setting values of the following SPs + input value with SP1-803-001] > motor speed adjustable range e.g.) 1.5 (SP1-801-025) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 2.5 In this case, "2.5"...

  • Page 656: Trapezoid Image Adjustment

    6. Troubleshooting 3. An error ("1") occurs in the SP1-803-006. [Setting values of the following SPs + input value with SP1-803-001] > motor speed adjustable range e.g.) 3.5 (SP1-801-001) + 1 (SP1-803-001 to -003) = 4.5 In this case, "4.5" is over the maximum adjustable value ("4") of the SP1-801-025. As a result, the result of the motor speed adjustment issues "1"...
  • Page 657 Troubleshooting Guide 2. Make sure the horizontal lines are parallel. "Parallel": The gap between horizontal lines is 1.8 mm or less. 3. If the lines are not parallel, check the following and apply corrections as necessary: • Make sure that the side fences of the tray are set neatly against the sides of the paper. •...
  • Page 658 6. Troubleshooting 2. Remove the interlock switch bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 2). 3. Loosen the four screws [A] on the front fusing guide. 4. Remove the screw [B] on the adjustor lever. • This screw is not necessary after tightening the front fusing guide.

  • Page 659: Loud Squeaking Noise From Pcdu

    Troubleshooting Guide 5. If the horizontal lines slope down to the left [A], move the front fusing guide upward. To do this, turn the adjustor lever [B] of the fusing front guide clockwise [C]. • One step of the adjustor lever moves the front fusing guide by 1 mm. 6.
  • Page 660 6. Troubleshooting A loud squeaking noise can be heard when two of the following conditions are met: • High image coverage • High original-to-copy ratio (1-to-x) • Printing at half speed Cause: Normally, silica inside the toner is deposited on the drum surface over a long period of time, some of which is removed by the cleaning blade.
  • Page 661 Troubleshooting Guide 3. Carefully lift up the metal plate [A], and then remove the spring [B] at the front side and rear side. • Be careful not to bend the metal plate. 4. Attach the modified spring [A] to the boss [B] on the lubricant holder. 5.

  • Page 662: Loud Noise From The Paper Tray

    6. Troubleshooting • [A]: Standard spring (P/N: AA063887) • [B]: Modified spring (P/N: AA063690) The modified spring [B] is black, and about 3 mm shorter than the old spring. 6. Reattach the upper cover of the drum unit. 7. Reattach the front cover to the PCDU ( x 2), and then reinstall the PCDU in the machine.
  • Page 663 Troubleshooting Guide Possible Cause List Cause 1: Grainy Image on Rough Surface Paper When the surface of the paper is relatively rough, the strength of the electrical field between the ITB and the "sunken" areas in the paper weakens, causing low image density only in these areas.
  • Page 664 6. Troubleshooting Action Procedure 1. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, select "CMY +K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below. 2. Change the paper transfer bias. For details, see "Action 2A" described below. 3.
  • Page 665 Troubleshooting Guide Action Procedure 1. If the grainy images only appear in black image areas with Printer Full Color mode, select "CMY +K" with the PCL printer driver. For details, see "Action 1" described below. 2. Use the A4 LEF paper. If A4 LEF paper does not solve the grainy image, check the other causes (Cause 1, 2 and 3) 3.
  • Page 666 6. Troubleshooting Cause 8: Bk Grainy Image on High Smoothness Paper The black solid image may become grainy on the high smoothness paper when the black solid area is printed in the full color printing mode. This is because the transfer current for the full color printing is excessive for the high smoothness paper.
  • Page 667 Troubleshooting Guide • Full Color mode/ Normal speed: SP2-757-001 Full Color mode/ Low speed: SP2-757-003 - If the current Paper Type setting is one of the following, change it to Special Paper 4. • Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2, Thick Paper 3 Select Special Paper 4, then adjust the settings of the following SP modes: •...
  • Page 668 6. Troubleshooting • Basically, there are different setting values for 1st side and 2nd side of thick paper when using the by-pass printing mode. When using thick paper in the by-pass printing mode, adjust the PTR current of Special Paper 4 for the 2nd side of thick paper. Always use the adjusted setting of Special Paper 4 when the 2nd side of thick paper is fed from the by-pass tray.
  • Page 669 Troubleshooting Guide 2. If the grainy images get worse, decrease the correction value of the PTR current for each paper size in steps of -10% against the default setting for each SP mode until -30% against the default setting of each SP mode.

  • Page 670: Toner Supply Error

    6. Troubleshooting • B/W mode/ Normal or low speed for Special 3 Paper: SP2-852-001 to -004 • B/W mode/ Low speed for Special 4 Paper: SP2-783-001 • B/W mode/ Low speed for Special 5 Paper: SP2-833-001 • B/W mode/ Low speed for Special 6 Paper: SP2-883-001 If the result of step 2 is not satisfactory, change the settings of SP2-351-001 by -2 A or SP2-351-003 by -1 A again and then decrease the transfer current of the PTR for each paper type by 1 A until -4 A from the default setting again.

  • Page 671: Paper Jam Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Guide 3. Check if the red mark is painted besides the black cord of the toner supply motor. The left picture [A] shows a correct motor and right picture [B] shows a malfunction motor. • Replace the toner supply motor with a new motor if the red mark is painted besides the red cord of the toner supply motor.
  • Page 672 6. Troubleshooting Jam 3: Paper is not fed from Tray 1. 1. Pull out the tray 1 and tray 2 from the machine ( x 2 each). 2. Turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-005 (Output check: Paper Feed M1:CCW:190mm/ 3.
  • Page 673 Troubleshooting Guide 5. Open the duplex unit with the paper feed motor rotating. 6. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 1 gently with a small piece of paper, as shown above. 7. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily. 8.
  • Page 674 6. Troubleshooting 1. Pull out the paper tray from the machine. 2. Hold the sides of the end fence [A], and then move it to the position as shown above. 3. Turn over the paper tray [A]. 4. Install the end fence stopper [B] in the notch [C] of the end fence.
  • Page 675 Troubleshooting Guide 5. Install the screw [A] loosely in the end fence stopper. 6. Turn over the paper tray, and then adjust the end fence for the paper size to be used. 7. Pull the end fence stopper [A], and then tighten the screw. 8.
  • Page 676 6. Troubleshooting 4. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051164 if the feed roller shaft does not rotate. 5. Open the lower right door with the paper feed motor rotating. 6. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 2 gently with a small piece of paper, as shown above.
  • Page 677 Troubleshooting Guide 7. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily. 8. Ask a customer to fix the end fence and side fences in the tray 1 with the end fence stopper and screws installed in the tray 1. •...
  • Page 678 6. Troubleshooting 3. Turn over the paper tray [A]. 4. Install the end fence stopper [B] in the notch [C] of the end fence. 5. Install the screw [A] loosely in the end fence stopper. 6. Turn over the paper tray, and then adjust the end fence for the paper size to be used.
  • Page 679 Troubleshooting Guide 7. Pull the end fence stopper [A], and then tighten the screw. 8. Make sure that the end fence is firmly fixed. Jam 8: Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray. 1. Remove the paper from the trays 1 and 2. 2.
  • Page 680 6. Troubleshooting 5. Replace the one-way clutch [A] with P/N D1051166 if the roller stops easily. Jam 11: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not detect paper from the tray 1. 1. Remove the paper from the trays 1 and 2. 2.
  • Page 681 Troubleshooting Guide 6. If Jam 11 still occurs, replace the brackets [A] [B] for the vertical transport covers (Front: P/N D0392943, Rear: P/N D0392944). Jam 12: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not detect paper from Tray 2. 1. Remove the lower guide bracket ( p.268 "Vertical Transport Sensor ") 2.
  • Page 682 6. Troubleshooting 4. If Jam 11 still occurs, replace the brackets [A] [B] for the vertical transport covers (Front: P/N D0392943, Rear: P/N D0392944). Jam 17: Registration sensor does not detect paper. 1. Remove the paper from the trays 1 and 2. 2.
  • Page 683 Troubleshooting Guide 6. If Jam 17 still occurs, turn on the paper feed motor using SP5-804-009 (Output check: Paper Feed M2:CW:190mm/s). 7. Press the surface of the vertical transport roller [A] for the tray 2 gently with a small piece of paper, as shown above.

  • Page 684: No Feed Paper Jam From Pfu

    6. Troubleshooting 2. Replace the brackets for the vertical transport covers (Front: P/N D0392943, Rear: P/N D0392944). Jam 59: Fusing exit sensor does not turn off. If Jam 59 occurs frequently, replace the fusing exit sensor bracket (D0394952) ( p.274 "Fusing Exit Sensor").

  • Page 685: Setting For Special Paper 4, 5 And 6 Mode

    Troubleshooting Guide 2. Replace the pressure tension springs (P/N D3312773) as shown above with special springs (P/N D3312774) ( "Lift Motors" under the chapter Replacement and Adjustment" of the PFU service manual). Side Effect: These "special springs" will increase the paper feed pressure. Therefore, if a customer uses thin paper types after installing "special springs", multi-feeds may occur.
  • Page 686 6. Troubleshooting Same as Thick Paper 1 Special Paper 5 Same as Thick Paper 1 (160°C) Special Paper 6 Same as Thick Paper 1 145°C • Special Paper 1-3 are designed for plain paper and Middle Thick paper types. • Special Paper 4-6 are designed for paper types equivalent to Thick paper 1 or thicker. •...
  • Page 687 Troubleshooting Guide Special Paper 3 Special Paper 3 Plain Paper or Middle Thick Special Paper 4 Special Paper 1 Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3 Special Paper 5 Special Paper 2 Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3 Special Paper 6 Special Paper 3 Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3 2.
  • Page 688 6. Troubleshooting Tray 1 to 2 Target Tray None Not Available (Tray 3 and 4 do not have thick Special Paper 4 to 6 Tray 3 to 4 paper capability.) Bypass Tray Bypass Tray None Special Paper 1 to 3 Paper Trays (Trays 1–...
  • Page 689 Troubleshooting Guide Special Paper 4 to 6 1. In User Tools, set the "Paper Type" and "Paper Thickness" for the target tray. Equivalent to Paper Type Paper Thickness Special Paper 4 Special Paper 1 Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3 Special Paper 5 Special Paper 2 Thick Paper 1, 2 or 3...
  • Page 690 6. Troubleshooting Middle Thick RTR standard Resolution Paper size correction co-efficient Mode Print side current (Process Speed) ( A) Face side 2-703-001 600dpi (120mm/s) Back side 2-703-002 Common with the Plain Paper 1 Face side 2-703-003 1200dpi (60mm/s) Back side 2-703-004 Face side 2-707-001...
  • Page 691 Troubleshooting Guide Face side 60mm/s Only 2-482-001 Only Common with the Plain Paper 1 60mm/s Face side Color 2-483-001 Only Only Thick Paper 1 Resolution RTR standard current Paper size correction co-efficient Mode Print side (Process Speed) ( A) Face side 2-511-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4), 60mm/s Only 2-502-001...
  • Page 692 6. Troubleshooting 60mm/s Face side 2-603-001 Only Only Common with the Thickl Paper 1 60mm/s Face side Color 2-608-001 Only Only Special Paper 1 RTR standard Resolution Paper size correction co-efficient Mode Print side current (Process Speed) ( A) 2-761-005(S2), 009(S3), 013(S4), Face side 2-753-001 017(S5)
  • Page 693 Troubleshooting Guide Face side 2-803-001 600dpi (120mm/s) Back side 2-803-002 Common with the Special Paper 1 Face side 2-803-003 1200dpi (60mm/s) Back side 2-803-004 Face side 2-807-001 600dpi (120mm/s) Back side 2-807-002 Color Common with the Special Paper 1 Face side 2-807-003 1200dpi (60mm/s)
  • Page 694 6. Troubleshooting Special Paper 5 RTR standard Resolution Paper size correction co-efficient Mode Print side current (Process Speed) ( A) 60mm/s Face side 2-833-001 Only Only Common with the Special Paper 4 60mm/s Face side Color 2-837-001 Only Only Special Paper 6 RTR standard Resolution Paper size correction co-efficient...

  • Page 695: Jam Detection

    Jam Detection Jam Detection Paper Jam Display SP7-507 shows the paper jam history. • CODE: Indicates the jam code. • SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code. • TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001). • DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred. Paper Size Code Size Code Paper Size...

  • Page 696: Jam Codes And Display Codes

    6. Troubleshooting Jam Codes and Display Codes Mainframe SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location. Jam Code SP Display Description Display 7504 1 At Power On Paper is stack at power-on. Note 7504 3 Tray 1: ON Paper is not fed from tray 1. 7504 4 Tray 2: ON Paper is not fed from tray 2.
  • Page 697 Jam Detection Jam Code SP Display Description Display Paper exit sensor of the side tray does not detect 7504 29 R-tray Paper Exit: ON paper. Vertical Transport 7504 51 Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn off. A1, A2 Sensor1 Vertical Transport 7504 52 Vertical transport sensor 2 does not turn off.
  • Page 698 6. Troubleshooting Jam Code SP Display Description Display The mainframe detects the lock signal from the 7504 243 Stapler Motor R1, R2 staple motor of the internal finisher. The mainframe detects the lock signal from the 7504 244 Jogger Motor R1, R2 front or rear jogger motor of the internal finisher.
  • Page 699 Jam Detection ARDF (Original Jam) Jam Code SP Display Description Display 7505 1 At Power On Original is stack at power-on. 7505 3 Skew Correction: ON Skew correction sensor does not detect paper. 7505 4 Registration: ON Registration sensor does not detect paper. 7505 5 Paper Exit: ON Exit Sensor does not detect paper.
  • Page 700 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Locations...

  • Page 701: Electrical Component Defects

    Electrical Component Defects Electrical Component Defects Sensors • The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the BCU. Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open "Open Cover" is displayed. Duplex Unit Open Switch CN232/2 "Open cover"...
  • Page 702 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open/ ITB Rotation Sensor CN219/20 SC443 Shorted Open Jam A1 (Jam11) Vertical Transport Sensor CN219/10 Shorted Jam A1, A2 (Jam51) Paper end is not detected Open when there is no paper in the paper tray.
  • Page 703 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open Jam B (Jam18) Fusing Entrance Sensor CN214/14 Shorted Jam C (Jam58) Open Jam Z (Jam27) Duplex Entrance Sensor CN221/24 Shorted Jam Z (Jam67) Open Jam Z (Jam25) Duplex Exit Sensor CN221/27 Shorted Jam Z (Jam65)
  • Page 704 6. Troubleshooting Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Used toner near full Open indicated when it is not near full. ITB Toner Collection CN211/4 Bottle Full Sensor Used toner near full cannot Shorted be detected when the waste toner bottle is nearly full.

  • Page 705: Blown Fuse Conditions

    Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Activ Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open SC120 Scanner HP Sensor CN205/2 Shorted SC121 Open/ Platen cover open cannot Platen Cover Sensor CN205/5 be detected. Shorted Open/ ITB Contact Sensor CN234/5 SC442 Shorted Open Jam C (Jam 24) Inverter Sensor CN227/15 Shorted...
  • Page 706 6. Troubleshooting Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 120V 220V - 240V 10A/125V 10A/250V 24VS power to the BCU is not supplied. 10A/125V 10A/250V 24V power to the DRB and controller is not supplied. • For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse.

  • Page 707: Scanner Test Mode

    Scanner Test Mode Scanner Test Mode SBU Test Mode Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key. •...
  • Page 708 6. Troubleshooting • Over current or a defective element breaks the circuit. 3. Abnormal power supply •The required voltage is not supplied to the devices. 4. Overheat/overcooling • The environment is inappropriate for the board (the scanner unit). 5. Static electricity •...

  • Page 709: Energy Saving

    7. Energy Saving Energy Save Energy Saver Modes Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.

  • Page 710: Energy Save Effectiveness

    7. Energy Saving Return to Stand-by Mode Off/Sleep Mode Recovery time. DI-C1.5: Min. 10 sec. Recommendation We recommend that the default settings should be kept. • If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.
  • Page 711 Energy Save • Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later measurement). • Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode. • Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours) Here is an example calculation. Power Time Consumptio...

  • Page 712: Paper Save

    7. Energy Saving Paper Save Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment. 1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2.
  • Page 713 Paper Save 3. Duplex + Combine: Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4! To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter. The total counter counts all pages printed. • For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2. •...
  • Page 714 7. Energy Saving Total counter Duplex counter Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Paper Originals used used Saved SP8501-001 SP8411-001 If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously. The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of duplex/ combine jobs.
  • Page 715 Paper Save Total counter Duplex counter Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Paper Originals used used Saved SP8501-001 SP8421-005...
  • Page 716 7. Energy Saving...
  • Page 717 Model DI-C1.5 Machine Code: D104/D106 Appendices 17 December, 2010...
  • Page 719 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Appendix: Specifications General Specifications............................3 Copier................................3 Printer................................7 Scanner................................8 Supported Paper Sizes............................9 Paper Feed..............................9 Paper Exit..............................12 Platen/ARDF Original Size Detection......................16 Software Accessories............................18 Printer and LAN Fax Drivers........................18 Scanner Driver.............................18 Utility Software.............................19 Optional Equipment............................20 ARDF (D541)...............................20 Paper Feed Unit (D425)..........................20 Paper Feed Unit (D331)..........................21 Internal Finisher (D429) and Punch Unit (D390)..................22 Shift Tray (D428)............................23...

  • Page 720: Index

    System SP4xxx...............................207 SP4-XXX (Scanner)............................207 System SP5xxx...............................230 SP5-XXX (Mode)............................230 System SP6xxx...............................295 SP6-XXX (Peripherals)..........................295 System SP7-xxx..............................298 SP7-XXX (Data Log)..........................298 System SP8-xxx..............................333 SP8-xxx: Data Log2..........................333 Input and Output Check Tables........................377 Input Check Table.............................377 Output Check Table..........................386 Test Pattern Printing............................393 Printer Service Mode.............................395 SP1-XXX (Service Mode)..........................395 Scanner SP Mode............................404 SP1-xxx (System and Others)........................404 SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)......................405...

  • Page 721: Appendix: Specifications

    1. Appendix: Specifications General Specifications Copier Configuration: Desktop Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system Print Process: 4 drums tandem method Scan: 600 dpi Resolution: Print: 600 dpi/ 1200 dpi Scan: 8 bits/pixel each for RGB/ 600 dpi 1 bit/pixel Gradation: Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel Original type:...
  • Page 722 1. Appendix: Specifications ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF Thin (59 g/m or less) C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white) C1.5c: 25 cpm (color/black & white) Plain 1 (74 g/m or less)/ 2 (81 g/m or less) C1.5a: 20 cpm (color/black & white) C1.5c: 25 cpm (color/black &...
  • Page 723 General Specifications (Refer to "Supported Paper Sizes".) Minimum Maximum A5 (LEF)/ Tray 1/ Tray 2 A3/11" x 17" Print Paper Size: 8.5" x 11" By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 600 mm A5 (LEF)/ Optional Tray A3/11" x 17" 8.5"...
  • Page 724 2.0 W or less (*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT. The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology. Dimensions (W x D x H): Copier: 587 x 676 x 725 mm (23.1" x 26.7" x 28.5")

  • Page 725: Printer

    General Specifications Less than 85 kg (187 lb.) [without ARDF excluding toner] Weight: Less than 100 kg (220 lb.) [with ARDF excluding toner] Printer PCL 5c/6 (standard) Adobe PostScript 3 (optional) Printer Languages: PDF Direct (optional) PictBridge (optional) PCL 5c/6: 300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bit) Resolution and...

  • Page 726: Scanner

    1. Appendix: Specifications Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching) 160 GB (standard) Scanner Main scan/Sub scan Standard Scanner Resolution: 600 dpi Twain Mode: 100 to1200 dpi Available scanning Resolution Range: Delivery Mode: 100/200/300/400/600 dpi Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel Scan to E-mail / Folder: Scanning Throughput BW: 44 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /Compression: On (MH))

  • Page 727: Supported Paper Sizes

    Supported Paper Sizes Supported Paper Sizes Paper Feed North America BT: By-pass Tray, T1/2: Tray 1/2 (standard), T3/4: Tray 3/4 (option), DU: Duplex Unit Size Paper T1/2 T3/4 (W x L) A3 W 12" x 18" A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A4 LEF...
  • Page 728 1. Appendix: Specifications Size Paper T1/2 T3/4 (W x L) Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10" x 14" 8"...
  • Page 729 Supported Paper Sizes Europe/ Asia BT: By-pass Tray, T1/2: Tray 1/2 (standard), T3/4: Tray 3/4 (option), DU: Duplex Unit Size Paper T1/2 T3/4 (W x L) A3 W 12" x 18" A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A5 SEF...

  • Page 730: Paper Exit

    1. Appendix: Specifications Size Paper T1/2 T3/4 (W x L) 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10" x 14" 8" x 10" 267 x 390mm 16K SEF 195 x 267mm 16K LEF 267 x 195mm Custom Com10 Env. 4.125"...
  • Page 731 Supported Paper Sizes Paper Size (W x L) Main 1-bin Shift Side A3 W 12" x 18" A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF...
  • Page 732 1. Appendix: Specifications Paper Size (W x L) Main 1-bin Shift Side 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10" x 14" 8" x 10" 267 x 390 mm 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Custom Com10 Env.
  • Page 733 Supported Paper Sizes Internal finisher Paper Size (W x L) 2/3P A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm B5 LEF...

  • Page 734: Platen/Ardf Original Size Detection

    1. Appendix: Specifications Internal finisher Paper Size (W x L) 2/3P 16K SEF 195 x 267 mm 16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Custom Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm C5 Env.
  • Page 735 Supported Paper Sizes A5 (148 x 210) L A5 (210 x 148) S B6 (128 x 182) L B6 (182 x 128) S 11" x 17" (DLT) 11" x 15" 10" x 14" 8.5" x 14" (LG) 8.5" x 13" (F4) 8.25"...

  • Page 736: Software Accessories

    1. Appendix: Specifications Software Accessories The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD-ROMs 1: Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM 2: Scanner Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM. An auto-run installer lets you to select the components you want to install. Printer and LAN Fax Drivers MacOS8.6 to 9.x, Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista,...

  • Page 737: Utility Software

    Software Accessories Utility Software Software Description Font Manager A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer (2000/XP/Server 2003/7) This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP This Printer Utility for Mac software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients.

  • Page 738: Optional Equipment

    1. Appendix: Specifications Optional Equipment ARDF (D541) Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Simplex Weight 40 to 128 g/m (10 to 34 lb.) Paper Size/Weight: Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Duplex Weight 52 to 105 g/m (14 to 28 lb.) Table Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m , 20 lb)

  • Page 739: Paper Feed Unit (D331)

    Optional Equipment Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame) Power Consumption: 15 W Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 mm x 520 mm x 137 mm (22" x 20.8" x 5.48") Weight: Less than 12 kg (26.4 lbs) Paper Feed Unit (D331)

  • Page 740: Internal Finisher (D429) And Punch Unit (D390)

    1. Appendix: Specifications Internal Finisher (D429) and Punch Unit (D390) No punch mode: A3/11" x 17" to B6/5.5" x 8.5" (SEF) Punch mode: 2 holes: A3, A4 or 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (SEF), 8.5" x 13" (SEF), 8.5" x 11" 3 holes: A3, A4 (LEF) or 11"...

  • Page 741: Shift Tray (D428)

    Optional Equipment Power consumption: 50 W + 12 W (Punch Unit) Finisher: 535 x 525 x 205 mm (21.1" x 20.7" x 8.1") Dimensions (W x D x H): Punch Unit: 98 x 500 x 165 mm (3.9" x 19.7" x 6.5") Without punch unit: 13 kg (28.6 lb.) Weight:...

  • Page 742: Side Tray (D427)

    1. Appendix: Specifications Weight: Less than 2kg (4.4lbs) Size (W x D x H): 455 x 530 x 226mm (18.2" x 21.2" x 9") Side Tray (D427) Standard Size: Paper Size: A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m , 16 to 28 lb.

  • Page 743: Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables

    2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Maintenance Tables Preventive Maintenance Items A4 (LT) long-edge feed 5% image coverage ratio Color ratio: 20% 2 print/job Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. • Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect Mainframe Item 120K...
  • Page 744 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Item 120K 240K Remarks ITB and PTR unit ITB Cleaning Unit ID Sensors Alcohol Fusing Alcohol Pressure Roller *: Clean it if dirty. Heating Roller Thermistor Dry cloth Pressure Roller Thermistor Dry cloth Entrance Guide Plate Alcohol Exit Guide Plate Alcohol...

  • Page 745: Others Yield Parts

    Maintenance Tables Item 120K 240K Remarks Vertical Transport Roller Damp cloth Vertical Transport Sensor Dry cloth By-pass Feed Roller Damp cloth By-pass Friction Pad Dry cloth By-pass HP Sensor Dry cloth Paper Dust Container Vacuum Duplex Duplex Transport Roller Damp cloth Duplex Exit Sensor Dry cloth Paper Exit...
  • Page 746 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Development Unit-K, C, M, Y ITB and PTR unit Image Transfer Belt PTR unit Fusing Fusing Unit ARDF (D366) Item Remarks Pick-up Roller Number of originals Feed Belt Number of originals Separation Roller Number of originals Sensors Blower brush Damp cloth;...
  • Page 747 Maintenance Tables Paper Feed Guide Dry cloth Friction Pad Dry cloth Paper Feed Clutch Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D331) Item 120K Remarks Paper Feed Roller Dry cloth Friction Pad Dry cloth Paper Feed Guides Dry cloth Relay Rollers Dry cloth Bottom Plate Pad Dry cloth Relay Clutch...
  • Page 748 2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables Tray Damp cloth...

  • Page 749: Appendix: Sp Mode Tables

    3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables System SP1-xxx SP1-XXX (Feed) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing 1001 for each mode.
  • Page 750 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 011 Tray:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG 012 Tray:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG 013 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 014 By-pass:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 015 By-pass:Thick1:1200dpi *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] 016 By-pass:Thick2:1200dpi *ENG 017 By-pass:Thick3:1200dpi *ENG 018 By-pass:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG 019 Duplex:Plain:1200dpi *ENG 020 Duplex:M-Thick:1200dpi *ENG [Side-to-Side Registration]...
  • Page 751 System SP1-xxx 001 Tray1:Plain:600dpi *ENG 002 Tray1:Thick1:600dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 2 / 1 mm/step] 003 Tray1:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG 004 Tray234:Plain:600dpi *ENG 005 Tray234:Thick1:600dpi *ENG 006 Tray234:M-Thick:600dpi *ENG 007 By-pass:Plain:600dpi *ENG 008 By-pass:Thick1:600dpi *ENG [–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 009 By-pass:Thick2:600dpi *ENG 010 By-pass:Thick3:600dpi...
  • Page 752 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display 0:LT SEF/ 1:LG *ENG Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass tray. This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than 8.5". 0: LT SEF (default), 1: LG [Reload Permit Setting] DFU Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
  • Page 753 System SP1-xxx Temp.:Delta:Warm: Center *ENG [0 to 100 / NA: 10, EU/AA: 15 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (center) when the fusing unit is determined as warm state. Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 45 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the heating roller (end) when the fusing unit is determined as warm state.
  • Page 754 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature correction of the pressure roller in the black and white mode when the fusing unit is determined as cold state. Rotation Time:BW:Cold *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the...
  • Page 755 System SP1-xxx Rotation Time:BW:Hot *ENG [0 to 200 / 2 / 1 sec/step] Specifies the threshold time for the fusing unit heating in black and white mode when the fusing unit is determined as hot state. 030 Flicker Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Temp.:Delta:Cold: *ENG...
  • Page 756 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 003 Temp.:Upper Delta:Center *ENG [0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step] 004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 50 / NA: 15, EU/AA: 25 / 1 deg/step] 005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 deg/step] 006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]...
  • Page 757 System SP1-xxx 019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step] Temp.:Lower *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center:Sp.3 021 Temp.:Lower Delta:End:Sp.3 *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:Upper *ENG [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center:Sp.3 023 Temp.:Upper Delta:End:Sp.3...
  • Page 758 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 160 / NA: 140, EU/AA: 131 / 1 deg/ Plain1:BW:Center *ENG step] Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing. Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value for each destination is the upper limit for this setting. Plain1:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 95 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 759 System SP1-xxx 010 Thin:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Thin:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 160 / 125 / 1 deg/step] Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. 012 Thin:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] M-thick:FC:Center...
  • Page 760 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Thick2:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step] Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. 024 Thick2:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step] Thick3:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 150 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 761 System SP1-xxx 036 Special2:BW:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Special3:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 175 / 145 / 1 deg/step] Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. 038 Special3:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Special3:BW:Center...
  • Page 762 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Plain2:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step] Speed Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. Plain2:BW:Press:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] (DFU) Thin:FC:Center:Low Speed *ENG...
  • Page 763 System SP1-xxx Special1:FC:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 115 / 1 deg/step] Speed Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. Special1:FC:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Speed (DFU) Special1:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 110 / 1 deg/step] Speed...
  • Page 764 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Special3:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 200 / 105 / 1 deg/step] Speed Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. Special3:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] Speed (DFU) OHP:Center *ENG...
  • Page 765 System SP1-xxx Special4:FC:Center *ENG [120 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step] Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. 142 Special4:FC:Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 140 / 1 deg/step] Special4:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 200 / 125 / 1 deg/step] Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting.
  • Page 766 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 154 Envelop:Press:Thick1 (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 135 / 1 deg/step] Envelop:Center:Thick2 *ENG [100 to 200 / 145 / 1 deg/step] Usage Limitation: +5°C against the default value is the upper limit for this setting. 156 Envelop:Press:Thick2 (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 165 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 767 System SP1-xxx 003 Pressure Center [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 005 Thermister Atmosphere [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step] 006 Pressure End [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step] The pressure roller has no lamp. 1107 [Standby Target Temp.
  • Page 768 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.] Center *ENG [120 to 150 / 130 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job. Press (DFU) *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.
  • Page 769 System SP1-xxx Job High Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step] Correction:Sp. 1112 [Image Process Temp. Correction] These SPs are used for the fusing temperature control for variable job images. This control saves the power comsumption when the machine copies or prints a job text image in black and white mode.
  • Page 770 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 1113 [Curl Correction] [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] Execute Pattern *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON Selects the curl correction type. -002 to -006, -008, These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting. -009 Humidity:Threshold:M- *ENG...
  • Page 771 System SP1-xxx [Heat Storage Status] DFU 1114 These SPs are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting. Temp.:Threshold: Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for the heat storage status. Temp.:Threshold: *ENG [0 to 200 / 80 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 772 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Delay:Standard Speed:BW: *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step] 035 Delay:Low Speed:FC:2 *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step] 036 Delay:Low Speed:FC:2 *ENG [0 to 20,000 / 0 / 1 msec/step] 041 Press Reference Temp.
  • Page 773 System SP1-xxx Paper Thickness *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step] Coeff.:Plain2:Low Speed Paper Thickness *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step] Coeff.:Thin:Low Speed Paper Thickness Coeff.:M- *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step] thick:Low Speed Paper Thickness *ENG...
  • Page 774 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Paper Thickness *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 /step] Coeff.:Envelop:Thick3 [Time Control] DFU 1117 The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting. 001 Control Time1 *ENG [0 to 1000 / 1 / 1 sec./step] 002 Control Time2...
  • Page 775 System SP1-xxx Temp:Other.Center2:LowSpee *ENG [-35 to 35 / 20 / 1°C/step] 022 Temp:Other:End2:LowSpeed *ENG [-35 to 35 / 20 / 1°C/step] 023 Temp:Envelop:Center1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 15 / 1°C/step] 024 Temp:Envelop:End1 *ENG [-35 to 35 / 15 / 1°C/step] 025 Temp:Envelop:Center2 *ENG [-35 to 35 /15 / 1°C/step]...
  • Page 776 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 002 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 10000 / 600 / 1 msec/step] [CPM Down Setting] DFU Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode. 1124 The following SPs below are desgined for the factory use only. Do not change the adjusted setting.
  • Page 777 System SP1-xxx Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size. High:2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 225 / 205 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A3 Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size. High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 225 / 210 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 778 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A5 paper size. High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 225 / 225 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A5:Press Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size. High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 225 / 191 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 779 System SP1-xxx [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Productivity Priority mode 001 Feed Permit Condition *ENG 1: Quality Priority mode 1 2: Quality Priority mode 1 Selects the feed permission type. 0: No paper feed permission 1: Paper feed permission is done when changing the paper size from smaller one to larger one.
  • Page 780 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Heater OFF Time: Normal *ENG [0 to 20000 / 1200 / 1 msec./step] Speed: BW Heater OFF Time:Low *ENG [0 to 20000 / 6300 / 1 msec./step] Speed:FC Heater OFF Time:Low *ENG [0 to 20000 / 1400 / 1 msec./step] Speed:BW Heater OFF Time: After State *ENG...
  • Page 781 System SP1-xxx Htg Roller:Ctr Diff2 *ENG [-200 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] SPs from -151 to -157 show previous fusing SC information. 154 Htg Roller:End Diff2 *ENG 155 Htg Roller:End Det2 *ENG 156 Htg Roller:End Corr2 *ENG [-10 to 260 / - / 1 deg/step] 157 Press Roller Temp Value2 *ENG 158 Press Roller:End Temp Value2...
  • Page 782 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Execute Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller. If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure roller or install a new fusing unit. Pre-Idling Time *ENG [0 to 999 / 600 / 1 sec/step]...
  • Page 783 System SP1-xxx Time:Heat Storage Devision2 * ENG [0 to 250 / 30 / 1 sec../step] Sepcifies the execution time 2 for the warming up in the low temperature condition. 1801 [Motor Speed Adjust] 001 Regist Mot:60:Thick *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step] 002 Regist Mot:120 *ENG 003 Bk OpcDevMot:120...
  • Page 784 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 021 Inverter:CW60:Thick *ENG 022 Inverter:CW120 *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0 / 0.05 %/step] 023 Inverter:CCW60:Thick *ENG 024 Inverter:CCW120 *ENG 025 Duplex Entrance:60 *ENG 026 Duplex Entrance:120 *ENG [–2 to 2 / 0.3 / 0.05 %/step] 027 Duplex Exit:60 *ENG 028 Duplex Exit:120...
  • Page 785 System SP1-xxx [Sub Mag ADJ] These SPs can adjust the sub-scan magnification error. However, first read the "Sub-scan Magnification Error" in the "Troubleshooting Guide" (Main Chapters) to execute these SPs. 1803 NEVER EXECUTE these SPs before reading the "Sub-scan Magnification Error". Otherwise, color registration errors occur on outputs and this cannot be recovered by the line position adjustment.
  • Page 786 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 002 R-Tray J-Gate SOL:ON *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 003 R-Tray J-Gate SOL:OFF *ENG 1950 [Fan Cooling Time Set] DFU 001 Development Fan1 *ENG 002 Development Fan2 *ENG 003 LD Unit Fan *ENG 004 Fusing Exit Sn Fan *ENG...
  • Page 787 System SP1-xxx 1953 [Extra Fan Control] [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] State *ENG 0: Off, 1: On Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off. Time: Threshold *ENG [0 to 60 / 60 / 1 min./step] Specifies the threshold time for the extra fan control.
  • Page 788 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Development Fan1 *ENG 002 Development Fan2 *ENG 003 Imaging Fan *ENG Fusing Exit Sensor Cooling [0 to 600 / 1 /.1 sec. /step] *ENG Specifies the initial execution time of the extra fan rotation for each fan. 005 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG 006 Electrical Unit Fan...

  • Page 789: System Sp2Xxx

    System SP2xxx System SP2xxx SP2-XXX (Drum) [Charge DC V:Fixed] DFU 2005 (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color) Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes. Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-041-1 Default: ON) is activated.
  • Page 790 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: C *ENG 003 Plain: M *ENG 004 Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 3000 / 2100 / 10V/step] 009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG 010 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG 011 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG 012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG...
  • Page 791 System SP2xxx [Charge AC Current: MM] DFU Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM (Color) 2009 Displays/sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MM environment (Middle temperature and Middle humidity). 001 Environmental Target: Bk *ENG [0 to 3000 / 610 / 10 A/step] 002 Environmental Target: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 630 / 10 A/step]...
  • Page 792 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Selects the AC voltage control type. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control 1: Manual control (AC voltages are decided with SP2006.) 2013 [Envir. Correct:PCU] Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity.
  • Page 793 System SP2xxx Displays the current temperature. 007 Current Temp.: Display *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step] Displays the current relative humidity. 008 Relative Humidity: Display *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step] Displays the absolute humidity. 009 Absolute Humidity: Display *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m...
  • Page 794 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 011 Sub:RH Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 %RH/step] 012 Sub:AH Change Thresh *ENG [0 to 20 / 1 / 0.1 g/m /step] 013 Non-use Time *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 10 min/step] 014 Correction Coeff.
  • Page 795 System SP2xxx High Coverage Threshold:2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 0.01%/step] Specifies the threshold for the high coverage image to the drum lubrication mode handled by the setting 2 (SP2-016-003). High Coverage Threshold:3 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.5 / 0.01%/step] Specifies the threshold for the low coverage image to the drum lubrication mode handled by the setting 3 (SP2-016-004).
  • Page 796 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 021 Average Coverage:3:C *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step] 022 Average Coverage:3:Y *ENG [0 to 100 / 0.05 / 0.01%/step] Mode Counter:K *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1 page/step] Displays the black print counter after the previous drum lubrication. Mode Counter:CMY *ENG [0 to 999 / - / 1 page /step]...
  • Page 797 System SP2xxx 001 Main Mag.: Bk:High Spd *ENG 003 Main Mag.: Bk:Low Spd *ENG 004 Main Mag.: C:High Spd *ENG 006 Main Mag.: C:Low Spd *ENG [0 to 560 / 280 / 1 /step] 007 Main Mag.: M:High Spd *ENG 009 Main Mag.: M:Low Spd *ENG 010 Main Mag.: Y:High Spd...
  • Page 798 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [LD Initial Power Adjust] 2104 Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new laser unit is installed. 001 Bk *ENG 002 C *ENG [80 to 120 / 100 / 1 %/step] 003 M *ENG 004 Y...
  • Page 799 System SP2xxx 001 Image Gamma Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 002 Shading Correction Flag *ENG [Test Pattern] 2109 Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD. Pattern Selection [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] 0 None 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12.
  • Page 800 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Executes the fine line position adjustment once. 002 Execute:Mode b If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again. Executes the rough line position adjustment once. After doing this SP, make sure to execute 003 Execute:Mode c SP2111-001 or -002.
  • Page 801 System SP2xxx 001 C *ENG 002 M *ENG [–75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 003 Y *ENG [P-Sensor Test] Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check. 2140 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 PWM *ENG...
  • Page 802 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Maximum *ENG [TM-Sensor Test] 005 Maximum: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 006 Maximum: Center *ENG 007 Maximum: Rear *ENG [P-Sensor Test] Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check. 2143 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control...
  • Page 803 System SP2xxx [P-Sensor Test] Displays the minimum result 2 values of the ID sensor check. 2145 Front, Center, Rear: ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment and the process control 001 Minimum 2 *ENG [TM-Sensor Test] 005 Minimum 2: Front *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01V/step] 006 Minimum 2: Center...
  • Page 804 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 080 C: Area1 *ENG 081 C: Area2 *ENG 082 C: Area3 *ENG 083 C: Area4 *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0. [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] 084 C: Area5 *ENG 085 C: Area6 *ENG 086 C: Area7...
  • Page 805 System SP2xxx [Shading Correct Setting] FA Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power. The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited from area 1 to area 14. 2152 For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
  • Page 806 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 033 C: Area 0 *ENG 034 C: Area 1 *ENG 035 C: Area 2 *ENG 036 C: Area 3 *ENG 037 C: Area 4 *ENG 038 C: Area 5 *ENG 039 C: Area 6 *ENG This is for the synchronizing detection board.
  • Page 807 System SP2xxx 066 M: Area 1 *ENG 067 M: Area 2 *ENG 068 M: Area 3 *ENG 069 M: Area 4 *ENG 070 M: Area 5 *ENG 071 M: Area 6 *ENG 072 M: Area 7 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 073 M: Area 8 *ENG 074 M: Area 9...
  • Page 808 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 098 Y: Area 1 *ENG 099 Y: Area 2 *ENG 100 Y: Area 3 *ENG 101 Y: Area 4 *ENG 102 Y: Area 5 *ENG 103 Y: Area 6 *ENG 104 Y: Area 7 *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 105 Y: Area 8 *ENG...
  • Page 809 System SP2xxx 009 600dpi:Indet.:Bk *ENG 010 1200dpi:Indet.:Bk *ENG [10 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] 600dpi:Multivalued:Bk *ENG (2bit) 2180 [Line Pos. Adj. Clear] DFU 001 Color Regist. 003 MUSIC Result 004 Area Mag. Correction 2181 [Line Pos. Adj. Result] DFU Displays the values for each correction.
  • Page 810 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 003 Skew: C *ENG 004 Bent: C *ENG 005 M. Scan Shift: Left: C *ENG 006 M. Scan Shift: Center: C *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / 0 / 0.001 m/step] 007 M. Scan Shift: RIght: C *ENG 008 S.
  • Page 811 System SP2xxx 029 M. Cor.: Dot: M *ENG [–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 030 M. Cor.: Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: M *ENG 032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 033 M.
  • Page 812 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 055 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: Y *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step] 056 S. Cor.: 1200 Subdot: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step] 057 S. Cor.: 600 Subdot *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 line/step] 058 Drum Cor.:600:Subdot...
  • Page 813 System SP2xxx 020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 021 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 022 S. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line] 023 S.
  • Page 814 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 008 Area Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG 009 Area Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 boolean /step] 010 Area Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 boolean /step] 0: Adjusted with Bk 011 S.
  • Page 815 System SP2xxx 016 ch 1: Filter: Rear: a1 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 128596 / 1 bit/step] 017 ch 1: Filter: Rear: a2 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / –63398 / 1 bit/step] 018 ch 1: Filter: Rear: b0 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 84 / 1 bit/step] 019 ch 1: Filter: Rear: b1 *ENG [–131071 to 131071 / 168 / 1 bit/step]...
  • Page 816 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 ch 0: 1st *ENG 002 ch 0: 2nd *ENG 003 ch 0: 3rd *ENG 004 ch 0: 4th *ENG 005 ch 1: 1st *ENG 006 ch 1: 2nd *ENG [0.5 to 3 / 1.4 / 0.1 V/step] 007 ch 1: 3rd *ENG 008 ch 1: 4th...
  • Page 817 System SP2xxx Page: Standby: BW + FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
  • Page 818 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 007 Execution Result *ENG 0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed 008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step] 009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step] 010 Error Counter: C *ENG...
  • Page 819 System SP2xxx [LD Power: Fixed] DFU Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color. 2221 These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0". Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Bk:Normal Spd *ENG 002 C:Normal Spd *ENG 003 M:Normal Spd *ENG...
  • Page 820 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M *ENG 003 Plain: C *ENG 004 Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 800 / 450 / 10 –V/step] 009 Thick 2: Bk *ENG 010 Thick 2: M *ENG 011 Thick 2: C *ENG 012 Thick 2: Y *ENG...
  • Page 821 System SP2xxx Absolute Humidity: Threshold 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 8 / 0.01 g/m /step] Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM. Absolute Humidity: Threshold 3 *ENG [0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01 g/m /step] Adjusts the threshold value between MM and MH. Absolute Humidity: Threshold 4 *ENG [0 to 100 / 24 / 0.01 g/m...
  • Page 822 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt between images. This value is added to the value of the 001 Image Transfer *ENG image transfer belt bias. [10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step] Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller between images.
  • Page 823 System SP2xxx Image Transfer:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 60 / 13 / 1 A] Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper. [Common: FC: Bias] DFU 2357 Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec Image Transfer: Normal Spd:Bk *ENG...
  • Page 824 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 004 Image Transfer: Normal Spd:BK *ENG [1 to 50 / 25 / 1 /step] 005 Image Transfer: Normal Spd: C *ENG [1 to 50 / 46 / 1 /step] 006 Image Transfer: Normal Spd:M *ENG [1 to 50 / 43 / 1 /step] 007 Image Transfer:: Normal Spd:Y *ENG...
  • Page 825 System SP2xxx [Plain-T:SizeCorrect:BW] Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 2411 SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values. Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1 *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 826 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 4000 / 290 / 5%/step] 012 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd:S3 *ENG 250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 827 System SP2xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1 *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width) 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S1 *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd: S1 *ENG [100 to 4000 / 130 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2...
  • Page 828 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 4000 / 285 / 5%/step] 014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step] 015 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 829 System SP2xxx [1 to 50 / 9 / 1/step] 006 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 34 / 1/step] 007 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm >...
  • Page 830 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step] 016 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 29 / 1/step] 017 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm >...
  • Page 831 System SP2xxx [1 to 50 / 24 / 1/step] 008 Paper Transfer: Low : 2nd:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3 *ENG 250 mm >...
  • Page 832 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step] 019 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step] 020 Paper Transfer: Low 2nd: S5 *ENG 150 mm >...
  • Page 833 System SP2xxx [Plain: T-Edge Correction] DFU Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values. 2423 Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec •...
  • Page 834 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 011 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 45 / 1 /step] 012 Paper Transfer: FC: Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 31 / 1 /step] [Thin: Bias: BW] 2453 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white mode. Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG...
  • Page 835 System SP2xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [Thin: T-Edge Correct] DFU Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode.
  • Page 836 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 2483 [Gloss: Bias: FC] Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 – A /step] Adjusts the transfer current of the paper transfer roller for the 1st side of gloss paper in full color mode.
  • Page 837 System SP2xxx 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG Not used [Thick-T:Size Correct:BW] Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size. 2511 SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
  • Page 838 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 4000 / 100 / 5%/step] 001 Paper Transfer: 1st: S1 *ENG S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width) 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S1 *ENG Not used [100 to 4000 / 110 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm >...
  • Page 839 System SP2xxx [1 to 50 / 40 / 1/step] 009 Paper Transfer: 1st: S3 *ENG 250 mm > S3 size > 194 mm (Paper width) 010 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S3 *ENG Not used [1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm >...
  • Page 840 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 014 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S4 *ENG Not used [1 to 50 / 6 / 1/step] 017 Paper Transfer: 1st: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper width) 018 Paper Transfer: 2nd: S5 *ENG Not used [Thick 1:L-Edge Correct] DFU Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each...
  • Page 841 System SP2xxx 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG Not used [Thick 1: Switch Timing: T-Edge] DFU Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the 2524 paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Thick: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG...
  • Page 842 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Thick 2: L-Edge Correct] DFU Thick 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values. 2571 Thick: 60 mm/sec •...
  • Page 843 System SP2xxx 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [0 to -100 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG Not used 2580 [Thick 2 Env. Correct Table] DFU 003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 36 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd *ENG Not used...
  • Page 844 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [OHP: T-Edge Correct] DFU OHP: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each 2623 mode. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values. •...
  • Page 845 System SP2xxx [Thick 3: L-Edge Correct] DFU Thick 3 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values. 2654 Thick: 60 mm/sec •...
  • Page 846 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer: 1st *ENG [-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd *ENG Not used [Thick 3: Env. Correct Table] DFU 2660 Thick 3 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Thick: 60 mm/sec 003 Paper Transfer:BW:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 36 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 847 System SP2xxx [M-Thick:L-Edge Correct] DFU Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each 2721 mode. SP2703 and SP2707 are multiplied by these SP values. • The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2722. 001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd...
  • Page 848 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Paper Transfer:Normal:1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer:Normal:2nd *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step] 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [M-Thick:SwTiming:T-Edge] DFU Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 2724 Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 849 System SP2xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 – A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: Low: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 13 / 1 –...
  • Page 850 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 190 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S3...
  • Page 851 System SP2xxx [100 to 4000 / 340 / 5%/step] 018 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 210 / 5%/step] 019 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S5 *ENG 150 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 420 / 5%/step] 020 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S5 *ENG...
  • Page 852 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [100 to 4000 / 215 / 5%/step] 010 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 175 / 5%/step] 011 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 320 / 5%/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3...
  • Page 853 System SP2xxx [SP1,2,3-T:Size Env.Correct:BW] DFU Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller current for each paper 2763 size. SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values. Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1 *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG...
  • Page 854 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 50 / 13 / 1/step] 012 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 10 / 1/step] 013 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 15 / 1/step] 014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4...
  • Page 855 System SP2xxx 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S1 *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S1 *ENG [1 to 50 / 30 / 1/step] S1 size > 290 mm (Paper width) 003 Paper Transfer:Low:1st:S1 *ENG 004 Paper Transfer:Low:2nd:S1 *ENG [1 to 50 / 37 / 1/step] 005 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st: S2 *ENG 290 mm >...
  • Page 856 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 50 / 7 / 1/step] 014 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 22 / 1/step] 015 PaperTransfer:Low:1st:S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 4 / 1/step] 016 PaperTransfer:Low:2nd:S4...
  • Page 857 System SP2xxx [SP 1:SwTiming:L-Edge] DFU Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the 2772 paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG...
  • Page 858 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [SP 1: Env. Correct Table] DFU 2780 Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 003 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 859 System SP2xxx [100 to 4000 / 150 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 275 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: S4 *ENG 194 mm > S4 size > 150 mm (Paper width) [100 to 4000 / 400 / 5%/step] 017 Paper Transfer: S5...
  • Page 860 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [1 to 50 / 36 / 1/step] 005 Paper Transfer: S2 *ENG 290 mm > S2 size > 250 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 40 / 1/step] 009 Paper Transfer: S3 *ENG 250 mm > S2 size > 194 mm (Paper width) [1 to 50 / 27 / 1/step] 013 Paper Transfer: S4...
  • Page 861 System SP2xxx [SP4: L-Edge Correct] DFU Special 4 Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each 2795 mode. SP2783 and SP2787 are multiplied by these SP values. • The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2796. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 862 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [SP 2: Bias: BW] 2803 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in black-and-white mode. Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: Low: 1st...
  • Page 863 System SP2xxx [SP 2: SW Timing: L-Edge] DFU Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the 2822 paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd...
  • Page 864 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [SP 2: Env. Correct Table] DFU 2830 Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 003 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 23 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer:BW:Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 26 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer:FC:Normal:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 38 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 865 System SP2xxx [SP 5: SwTiming: L-Edge] DFU 2846 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 30 / 0 / 2 mm/step] [SP5: T-Edge Correct] DFU Special 5 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each...
  • Page 866 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Special 3: Bias: FC] 2857 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in full color mode. Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec 001 Paper Transfer: Normal: 1st *ENG [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 – A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Normal: 2nd *ENG [0 to 200 / 28 / 1 –...
  • Page 867 System SP2xxx [SP 3: T-Edge Correct] DFU Special 3 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values. 2873 Normal: 120mm/sec, Low: 60mm/sec •...
  • Page 868 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 011 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:1st *ENG [1 to 50 / 48 / 1 /step] 012 Paper Transfer:FC:Low:2nd *ENG [1 to 50 / 28 / 1 /step] [SP 6: Bias: BW] 2883 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 6 in black-and-white mode. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 –...
  • Page 869 System SP2xxx 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] [SP 6: Sw Timing: T-Edge] DFU 2898 Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [-98 to 0 / 0 / 2 mm/step]...
  • Page 870 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 003 DevRev: FC *ENG [0 to 200 / 70 / 10 msec/step] 004 DevRev: Bk *ENG [0 to 200 / 200 / 10 msec/step] 005 All *ENG [0 to 400000 / 0 / 10/step] 006 K *ENG 007 C *ENG...
  • Page 871 System SP2xxx [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 002 60 mm/sec *ENG 0: GAIN: High speed 1: GAIN: Low speed 2915 [GainAdj:BkOpcDevM] DFU [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 001 120 mm/sec *ENG 0: GAIN: High speed 1: GAIN: Low speed [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 002 60 mm/sec *ENG...
  • Page 872 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [P-Transfer:Bias Limit] DFU Paper Transfer Roller Feed-back: Threshold Adjustment 2930 Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance (division 2) at the paper transfer roller. This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939. 001 Bias *ENG [0 to 7000 / 6000 / 10 –V/step] 2931...
  • Page 873 System SP2xxx 2971 [BW Non-Image:Bias ON] T1 BW:Bias On:Normal *ENG [–360 to 80 / 0 / 10 msec/step] Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller in the normal speed. T1 BW:Bias On:Low *ENG [–780 to 210 / 0 / 10 msec/step] Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller in the low speed.
  • Page 874 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Forced CPM Down Thresh: *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step] No Duty Control Specifies the threshold page for the forced processing stop without the duty limit. Drum Stop Time: No Duty *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step] Control Specifies the drum brake time without the duty limit.

  • Page 875: System Sp3Xxx

    System SP3xxx System SP3xxx SP3-XXX (Process) 3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution] Executes the normal process control manually (potential control). 001 Normal Procon Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing this SP. Executes the toner density adjustment manually. 002 Toner Density Adjst Check the result with SP3-325-001 after executing this SP.
  • Page 876 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 History: Latest *ENG 002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG 003 Result: Latest 2 *ENG 004 Result: Latest 3 *ENG 005 Result: Latest 4 *ENG [1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step] 006 Result: Latest 5 *ENG 007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG...
  • Page 877 System SP3xxx 3015 [Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color]) 001 Execution: ALL 002 Execution: COL (MCY) 003 Execution: Bk Executes the manual toner supply to the development unit. 004 Execution: C 005 Execution: M 006 Execution: Y [Forced Toner Supply Cntl] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color]) 3016 Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
  • Page 878 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 006 Upper Counter: Bk *ENG 007 Upper Counter: C *ENG 008 Upper Counter: M *ENG Displays the total times of the Vt upper or lower 009 Upper Counter: Y *ENG limit error. 010 Lower Counter: Bk *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 times/step] 011 Lower Counter: C...
  • Page 879 System SP3xxx 005 Execution Flag: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 006 Execution Flag: C *ENG 0: Flag OFF, 1: Flag ON This flag is cleared after executing TD sensor 007 Execution Flag: M *ENG initialization. 008 Execution Flag: Y *ENG 3041 [Process Control Type]...
  • Page 880 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 3043 [TD Adjustment Mode] Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
  • Page 881 System SP3xxx Repeat Number: Recovery *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step] Not used Repeat Number: Job End *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at job end. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is...
  • Page 882 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables T1 Bias: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step] Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta. T1 Bias: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step] Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan. T1 Bias: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 10 / 1 A/step]...
  • Page 883 System SP3xxx [Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color]) 3044 Selects the toner supply method type. 001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with SP 3401) 002 C *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed) 003 M *ENG...
  • Page 884 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated by the operating 009-012 times of the toner supply pumps. 009 Toner Remaining: Bk *ENG 010 Toner Remaining: C *ENG [–50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 011 Toner Remaining: M *ENG 012 Toner Remaining: Y...
  • Page 885 System SP3xxx 028 Pixel: Consumption: Bk *ENG 029 Pixel: Consumption: C *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step] 030 Pixel: Consumption: M *ENG 031 Pixel: Consumption: Y *ENG 032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count. 032 Pixel: Remaining : Bk *ENG 033 Pixel: Remaining : C...
  • Page 886 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 050 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Bk *ENG 051 TE Sn Detect Thresh:C *ENG [1 to 600 / 57 / 1 g/step] 052 TE Sn Detect Thresh:M *ENG 053 TE Sn Detect Thresh:Y *ENG [Toner End Recovery] 3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.
  • Page 887 System SP3xxx [Vt Shift: Display/Set] 3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed. Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 60 mm/sec 001 Med Speed Shift:Bk *ENG 002 Med Speed Shift:C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.29 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Med Speed Shift:M *ENG 004 Med Speed Shift:Y *ENG...
  • Page 888 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 005 Initial: Bk *ENG 006 Initial: C *ENG [2 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Initial: M *ENG 008 Initial: Y *ENG [Vtcnt: Display/Set] 3222 Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color. 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: C...
  • Page 889 System SP3xxx 001 Lower: Bk *ENG 002 Lower: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 2 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Lower: M *ENG 004 Lower: Y *ENG 005 Upper: Bk *ENG 006 Upper: C *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 007 Upper: M *ENG 008 Upper: Y...
  • Page 890 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Low Coverage Coeff. Bk *ENG 002 Low Coverage Coeff.C *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step] 003 Low Coverage Coeffi.M *ENG 004 Low Coverage Coeff. Y *ENG 005 High Coverage Coeff, Bk *ENG 006 High Coverage Coeff, C *ENG...
  • Page 891 System SP3xxx 023 Process Control Thresh:LS *ENG [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 time/step] 3230 [Toner Supply MBD] DFU 001 ADD:TIME *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 10 msec/step] 002 ADD:K *ENG 003 ADD:C *ENG [0.01 to 2 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 004 ADD:M *ENG 005 ADD:Y...
  • Page 892 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 064 AWPUP:K *ENG 065 AWPUP:C *ENG [-1 to 1 / 1 / 0.0001 /step] 066 AWPUP:M *ENG 067 AWPUP:Y *ENG 070 AWILOW:LowSpd *ENG [0 to 100 / 2 / 0.01 /step] 071 AWPUP:LowSpd *ENG 090 SMITH:K *ENG 091 SMITH:C *ENG...
  • Page 893 System SP3xxx 124 ANC_A4_K *ENG 125 ANC_A4_C *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.17 / 0.001 /step] 126 ANC_A4_M *ENG 127 ANC_A4_Y *ENG 130 ANC_A3_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.44 / 0.001 /step] 131 ANCA4T_LowSpd *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 /step] 150 AWPNI_K *ENG 151 AWPNI_C...
  • Page 894 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 215 PIX_TBL_6 *ENG 216 PIX_TBL_7 *ENG 217 PIX_TBL_8 *ENG 218 PIX_TBL_9 *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 219 PIX_TBL_10 *ENG 220 PIX_TBL_11 *ENG 221 PIX_TBL_12 *ENG 222 PIX_COR_K *ENG 223 PIX_COR_C *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 224 PIX_COR_M *ENG...
  • Page 895 System SP3xxx 001 Conversion Coeff.:Bk *ENG 002 Conversion Coeff.:C *ENG [0.5 to 9.99 / 3.33 / 0.01 /step] 003 Conversion Coeff.:M *ENG 004 Conversion Coeff.:K *ENG 3232 [T-Supply Coeff.: Setting] DFU 001 Vt Proportion: Bk *ENG 002 Vt Proportion: C *ENG [0 to 2550 / 50 / 1 /step] 003 Vt Proportion: M...
  • Page 896 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 004 Correction Coeff.:4 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.25 / 0.01 /step] 005 Correction Coeff.:5 *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.5 / 0.01 /step] 3234 [Pixel-Prop. Coeff.3:Set] DFU 001 Correction Value 1 *ENG [-0.1 to 0 / -0.01 / 0.01 /step] 002 Correction Value 2 *ENG [0 to 0.1 / 0.01 / 0.01 /step]...
  • Page 897 System SP3xxx [Developer Agitation Setting] 3237 Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color. 001 Agitation Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step] [Vt Target: Setting] 3238 Displays the Vt target value at developer initialization. 001 Bk *ENG 002 C...
  • Page 898 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 013 T Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step] 014 T Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 V/step] 3241 [Background Potential Setting] 001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the charge bias referring to the development bias at process...
  • Page 899 System SP3xxx 017 Low Speed Coeff.:Bk *ENG 018 Low Speed Coeff.:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 128 / 1 /step] 019 Low Speed Coeff.:M *ENG 020 Low Speed Coeff.:Y *ENG 021 Low Speed Offset:Bk *ENG 022 Low Speed Offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 58 / 1 /step] 023 Low Speed Offset:M *ENG...
  • Page 900 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction. 005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251-017. 005 Average S: Bk *ENG 006 Average S: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step]...
  • Page 901 System SP3xxx 021 Total Page Setting: M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step] 022 Total Page Setting: L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step] 024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color. 024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG 025 Latest Coverage: C *ENG...
  • Page 902 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Execute the ID sensor initialization setting for all 010 P/TM Sensor All sensors [Vsg Adjust. Result: Vsg] 3322 Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor. 001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG 002 Vsg reg: C *ENG 003 Vsg reg: M *ENG...
  • Page 903 System SP3xxx 004 Vofset Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 1 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Vsg Upper Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 4.5 / 0.01 V/step] 006 Vsg Lower Threshold *ENG [0 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step] [Vsg Adjustment Result] Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.
  • Page 904 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 007 K5 Edit Point *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.15 / 0.01 /step] 008 K5 Target Voltage *ENG [0 to 5 / 1.63 / 0.01 V/step] [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 009 K5 Approximate Method *ENG 0:Linear, 1: Curve 010 K2: U/L Limit Coeff.
  • Page 905 System SP3xxx 005 Color Correct Coeff.:Bk *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 006 Color Correct Coeff.:C *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 0.95 / 0.01 /step] 007 Color Correct Coeff.:M *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1 / 0.01 /step] 008 Color Correct Coeff.:Y *ENG [0.5 to 2.0 / 1.01 / 0.01 /step]...
  • Page 906 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG 006 Minimum Supply Time: C *ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply time. [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step] 007 Minimum Supply Time: M *ENG 008 Minimum Supply Time: Y *ENG 3451 [T-Supply Carry Over: Display]...
  • Page 907 System SP3xxx 001 Process Control: BW *ENG 002 Process Control: FC *ENG 003 Power ON: BW *ENG 004 Power ON: FC *ENG 005 MUSIC: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 006 MUSIC: FC *ENG 007 Vsg Adj. *ENG 008 Charge AC Control *ENG...
  • Page 908 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 024 Correction Coeff. 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step] 025 Correction Coeff. 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step] 026 Correction Coeff. 1: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step] 027 Correction Coeff.
  • Page 909 System SP3xxx 002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step] 003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm /step] [Execution Interval: Display] Displays the current interval for process control execution. 3515 When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
  • Page 910 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 006 Pixel Coverage Sum: Bk *ENG 007 Pixel Coverage Sum: C *ENG 008 Pixel Coverage Sum: M *ENG 009 Pixel Coverage Sum: Y *ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm /step] 010 Required Area: Bk *ENG 011 Required Area: C *ENG...
  • Page 911 System SP3xxx 029 Refresh:Page Thresh *ENG 030 Mode Counter:Bk *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step] 031 Mode Counter:FC *ENG [Blade Damage Prevention] Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the transfer belt 3517 cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this value, toner is applied to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to prevent the blade from flipping over.
  • Page 912 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Toner End Prohibition Setting] 3519 Enables or disables each adjustment at toner end. 001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner end 002 MUSIC *ENG condition) 1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner end 003 TC Adjustment...
  • Page 913 System SP3xxx [Rapi Timer] Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the time-out time to get the Rapi timer. [Non-use Time Process Control Setting] Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by. 3531 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is executed.
  • Page 914 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the standard target development gamma for each color. 009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.9 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 010 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG 011 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step]...
  • Page 915 System SP3xxx [Dev. DC Control:Display] Normal: 120 mm/sec, Low: 70 mm/sec 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color. 001 Normal Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Normal Speed:C *ENG 003 Normal Speed:M *ENG 004 Normal Speed:Y *ENG [0 to 700 / 550 / 1 -V/step]...
  • Page 916 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Normal Speed:Bk *ENG 002 Normal Speed:C *ENG 003 Normal Speed:M *ENG 004 Normal Speed:Y *ENG [0 to 2000 / 690 / 1 -V/step] 009 Low Speed:Bk *ENG 010 Low Speed:C *ENG 011 Low Speed:M *ENG 012 Low Speed:Y *ENG...
  • Page 917 System SP3xxx [HST Controll Setting] TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting 3710 Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory, which is in the TD sensor. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 001 Control Selection *ENG 0: Not Use, 1: Use [HST Control: Bk] 3711 Displays the factory settings of the black PCU.
  • Page 918 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1 V/step] 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / 2.5 / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.3 / 0.01 V/step] 005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 1.2 / 0.01 V/step]...
  • Page 919 System SP3xxx 009 Serial Number 1 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step] 010 Serial Number 2 *ENG 011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / 3 / 0.1 V/step] 012 Adjustment: Vtref *ENG 013 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01 V/step] 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG...
  • Page 920 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Toner Collection Bttl Full] 3800 Displays/ adjusts the PCDU toner collection bottle detection settings. Condition *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] Displays the current condition of the PCDU toner collection bottle. 0: Factory default, 1: Before near full, 2; Near full, 3: Full, 4: Reserved Not used 002 Detection Times *CTL...
  • Page 921 System SP3xxx Displays the total amount from the near full detection. 013 Total Collected Toner *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 1 / 1] Displays the date of the near full detection for 014 Full Detection Date *ENG the PCDU toner collection bottle. 3810 [ITB T-Collection Bttl Full] Condition...
  • Page 922 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Day Thresh:NF *ENG [1 to 30 / 10 / 1 day/step] Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the IT toner collection bottle is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected the actuator in the ITB toner collection bottle.
  • Page 923 System SP3xxx 009 PCU: Bk *ENG 010 PCU: C *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 011 PCU: M *ENG 012 PCU: Y *ENG 013 ITB Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON...
  • Page 924 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Counter 1 *ENG 002 Counter 2 *ENG 003 Counter 3 *ENG 004 Counter 4 *ENG 005 Counter 5 *ENG 006 Counter 6 *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step] 007 Counter 7 *ENG 008 Counter 8 *ENG...

  • Page 925: System Sp4Xxx

    System SP4xxx System SP4xxx SP4-XXX (Scanner) [Sub Scan Mag. Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. 001 SScan Mag.Adjust *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 926 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Scanner Free Run] 4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode. Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT 001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON 002 Lamp: ON...
  • Page 927 System SP4xxx [APS Operation Check] 4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors. (See "Input Check Table".) 001 APS Operation Check [APS Min Size] 4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 APS Min.
  • Page 928 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 S1:R 002 S1:G [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step] 003 S1:B 004 S2:R 005 S2:G [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step] 006 S2:B 007 S3:R 008 S3:G [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit /step] 009 S3:B [Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG...
  • Page 929 System SP4xxx 0: Scanned image 13: Grid pattern CMYK 1: Gradation main scan A 14: Color patch CMYK 2: Gradation main scan B 15: Gray pattern (1) 3: Gradation main scan C 16: Gray pattern (2) 4: Gradation main scan D 17: Gray Pattern (3) 5: Gradation sub scan (1) 18: Shading pattern...
  • Page 930 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path. SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF Uses or does not use the shading image path.
  • Page 931 System SP4xxx 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 007 Photo:M *ENG 008 Photo:Y *ENG [ACC Correction: Dark] 4506...
  • Page 932 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B 005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B 009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B 013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B 017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B Specifies the printer vector correction 021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B value. *ENG 025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B 033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B...
  • Page 933 System SP4xxx Smoothing: 0 (x1), 1-7 (Strong) *ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step] -006 Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for smoother images. Brightness: 1–255 *ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step] -007 Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
  • Page 934 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Texture Erase:0 (Fix), 1-2 *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] Sets the erasure level of textures. Set higher for stronger effect, lower for weaker effect. This -010 SP (suffix "-010") only exists in SP4580, 4582 and 4583. 0: Not activated 4581 [FAX Appl.: Text] DFU...
  • Page 935 System SP4xxx 4602 [Scanner Memory Access] Enables the read and write check for the SBU 001 Scanner Memory Access registers. 4603 [AGC Execution] 001 HP Detection Enable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Executes the AGC. 002 HP Detection Disable [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] DFU 4604 [FGATE Open/Close] DFU...
  • Page 936 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board 001 Latest: RE Color (color printing speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board 002 Latest: RO Color (color printing speed).
  • Page 937 System SP4xxx [Analog Gain Adjust] DFU 4629 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. 001 Latest: G Color [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Analog Gain Adjust] DFU 4630 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Latest: B Color [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Digital Gain Adjust] DFU...
  • Page 938 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Scanner Hard Error] 4647 Displays the result of the SBU connection check. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 Power-ON 0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs. [Black Level Adj.
  • Page 939 System SP4xxx Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board Last Correct Value: BE *ENG (color printing speed). Color [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board Last Correct Value: BO *ENG...
  • Page 940 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Digital Gain Adjust] DFU 4663 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG [Black Level Adj.
  • Page 941 System SP4xxx Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment (rough adjustment) for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing 001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG speed). [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (color printing...
  • Page 942 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG [Digital Gain Adjust] DFU 4682 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]...
  • Page 943 System SP4xxx [Black Level Peak Read] DFU 4693 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 RE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 RO [Black Level Peak Read] DFU 4694 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 GE [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 GO...
  • Page 944 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change] [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Selects the SBU test pattern. 0: Normal output 1: Fixed value output 2: Main scan gradation 3: Sub scan gradation 4: Grid pattern 4808 [Factory Setting Input] DFU 002 Execution Flag...
  • Page 945 System SP4xxx Bit0: TAURUS register Bit1: ORION register Bit2: LUPUS register Test1 Bit3 to 11: Not used Bit12: Ri20 Bit13 to 15: Not used 0: OK, 1: Error Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the BCU board and displays the result. Bit0: Image path from SBU to TAURUS Bit1: Image path from TAURUS to ORION Bit2: Image path from ORION to TAURUS...
  • Page 946 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 4949 [ACC History:Previous] 001 YY/MM/DD *ENG Displays the previous ACC execution date. 002 HH/MM/SS *ENG Displays the previous ACC execution time. 4954 [Read/Restore Standard] 001 Scan New Chart Executes new chart scanning. 002 Recall Previous Chart Recalls the previous scanned chart.
  • Page 947 System SP4xxx Selects the Highlight correction level. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG 0: weakest sensitivity 9: strongest sensitivity Selects the range level of Highlight correction. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 002 Range Selection *ENG 0: weakest skew correction,...

  • Page 948: System Sp5Xxx

    3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables System SP5xxx SP5-XXX (Mode) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting Counter] Selects the counting method. 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
  • Page 949 System SP5xxx [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Coverage Counter Display] 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display...
  • Page 950 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 5063 [Small Tray] [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] *CTL 0: Normal Tray, 1: Envelope Feeder Changes the tray setting. 5066 [Parts PM Menu Display Setting] Not used [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: No Display, 1: Display...
  • Page 951 System SP5xxx [0 or 1 / 0 / -] *CTL 0: Off, 1: On Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up prevents mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel and an actual paper size on the by-pass tray.
  • Page 952 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 5118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled] 001 This program disables copying. [Mode Clear Opt. Counter [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but not 5120 *CTL Removal] used)/ 2: No (not removed)] This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or remove an optional counter, check the settings.
  • Page 953 System SP5xxx Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not. Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm. 5162 [App.
  • Page 954 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 005 Tray 2: 1 *ENG 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 006 Tray 2: 2 *ENG 0: A3, 1: DLT [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]...
  • Page 955 System SP5xxx [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 001 - *ENG 0: Disable 1: Enable [Copy NV Version] 5188 Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board. 001 - *CTL 5195 [Limitless SW] DFU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] *CTL 0: Productivity priority 1: Tray priority...
  • Page 956 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling. • If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
  • Page 957 System SP5xxx [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode. • Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
  • Page 958 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [Access Control] 5401 When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU Whenever a new login user is added to the address book in external certification mode (for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default document ACL is updated according to this SP setting.
  • Page 959 System SP5xxx SDK certification device *CTL • Bit 0: SDK authentication 0: Off (Default), 1: On (SDK authentication enabled) Selects the SDK authentication setting. • Bit 2: Administrator log in setting 0: Off (Default), 1: On Detail Option *CTL Enables or disables the log out confirmation option. •...
  • Page 960 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 5413 [Lockout Setting] Switches on/off the lock on the local address book account. 001 Lockout On/Off *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts.
  • Page 961 System SP5xxx Sets the number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal access to 001 Permissible Number *CTL the system. [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt] Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected.
  • Page 962 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of 004 Attack Max Num *CTL access attempts have been detected. [50 to 200 / 200 /1 attempt] [User Authentication] 5420 These settings should be done with the System Administrator.
  • Page 963 System SP5xxx Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications. 031 Scanner *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 /1] 0: On, 1: Off Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer applications. 041 Printer *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1]...
  • Page 964 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Group *CTL 0: Not permit, 1: Permit Turns on or off the copy permission of the group information for the external authentication. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Mail *CTL 0: Not permit, 1: Permit...
  • Page 965 System SP5xxx [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Smb Ftp Auth *CTL 0: Not permit, 1: Permit Turns on or off the copy permission of the SMB/FTP information for the external authentication. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] AcntAcl *CTL 0: Not permit, 1: Permit...
  • Page 966 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication failure occurs. 002 Panel Disp *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 1: On, 0: Off 5490 [MF Key Card (Japan only)] Sets up operation of the machine with a keycard.
  • Page 967 System SP5xxx [Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level. The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error alarm 5505 counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
  • Page 968 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable 001* Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam. Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable 002* Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams. Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable 003* Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
  • Page 969 System SP5xxx 006 Communication Test Call 007 Machine Information Notice 008 Alarm Notice [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 009 Non Genuin Tonner Alarm 0: Off 1: On 010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call 011 Supply Manegement Report Call 012 Jam/Door Open Call [Individual PM Part Alarm *CTL...
  • Page 970 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode. [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
  • Page 971 System SP5xxx [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Change Mk1 Cnt (Paper- *CTL >Combine) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 5801 [Memory Clear] Resets all correction data for process control and all 001 All Clear software counters, and returns all modes and adjustments to their default values.
  • Page 972 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables All setting of Network Setup (User Menu) 011 NCS (NCS: Network Control Service) Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for 012 R-FAX Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers. 014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings. Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) 015 Clear UCS Setting settings.
  • Page 973 System SP5xxx 006 EXE.M Execute the RFID communication test for magenta. 007 EXE.C Execute the RFID communication test for cyan. 008 EXE.Y Execute the RFID communication test for yellow. [SC Reset] Resets a type A service call condition. 5810 • Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code. 001 Fusing SC Reset 5811 [Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number Display...
  • Page 974 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Operation *CTL Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press 5816 [Remote Service] *CTL I/F Setting Selects the remote service setting. [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step] 0: Remote service off 1: CSS remote service on 2: @Remote service on...
  • Page 975 System SP5xxx RCG Write Timeout Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG. [1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step] RCG Read Timeout Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG. [1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step] Port 80 Enable Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.
  • Page 976 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Cert. Expire Timing DFU Proximity of the expiration of the certification. Use Proxy This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center. Proxy Host This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Embedded RC Gate-N and the gateway.
  • Page 977 System SP5xxx CERT: Up State Displays the status of the certification update. The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly. The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated. The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update.
  • Page 978 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired. Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification. Notification of a common certification without ID2.
  • Page 979 System SP5xxx Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote 092 CERT: Issuer certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote certification exists. Displays the start time of the period for which the current 093 CERT: Valid Start @Remote certification is enabled.
  • Page 980 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Line Connecting Not used 173 Modem Serial Number Not used Retransmission Limit Not used FAX TX Priority Not used 200 Manual Polling Not used Regist: Status Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device. 0: Neither the @Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gate is set.
  • Page 981 System SP5xxx Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with SP5816-203. 0: Succeeded 1: Confirmation number error 2: Registration in progress 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error...
  • Page 982 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Cause Code Meaning -11001 Chat parameter error Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error -11003 Unexpected error Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring -12002 device status. Operation Error, Incorrect Attempted registration without execution of an -12003 Setting inquiry and no previous registration.
  • Page 983 System SP5xxx -2393 RCG device not managed -2394 Device not managed -2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal -2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal -2397 Incorrect ID2 format -2398 Incorrect request number format Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup. 209 Instl Clear NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this setting has been changed.
  • Page 984 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility. 050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Enables or disables ECP Compatibility. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 052 ECP (Centro) •...
  • Page 985 System SP5xxx Enables or disables the Web operation. 091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format: 145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address "Link Local Address"...
  • Page 986 Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web system. 237 Web shopping link visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 987 System SP5xxx 001 HDD Formatting (ALL) 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) 005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only 006 HDD Formatting (User Info) if there is a hard disk error. 007 Mail RX Data 008 Mail TX Data 009 HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)
  • Page 988 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) , 077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200 6: 2/3 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped) , 078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200 6: 2/3 5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format...
  • Page 989 System SP5xxx Sets the IP address for the primary capture server. This is 101 Primary srv IP address basically adjusted by the remote system. 102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 103 Primary srv port number This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 990 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Reso: Fax (Color) [0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 991 System SP5xxx [1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step] Channel MAX *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13 NA/ Asia: 1 to 11 Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.
  • Page 992 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Selects the WEP key. [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary] 00: Key #1 011 WEP key Select *CTL 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 11: Key #4 (Reserved) Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
  • Page 993 System SP5xxx 001 Toner Name Setting: Black 002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan 003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow 004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta Specifies supply names. These appear on the screen when the user 007 OrgStamp *CTL presses the Inquiry button in the user tools screen.
  • Page 994 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 006 PnP Model Name *CTL Inputs the model name. 007 PnP Serial Number *CTL Inputs the serial number. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Notify Unsupport *CTL 0: Disable, 1: Enable Enables or disables the unsupported USB display. [Delivery Server Setting] *CTL 5845...
  • Page 995 System SP5xxx Delivery Svr Capability [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered. Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists...
  • Page 996 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Rapid Sending Control Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending error. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Disable, 1: Enable 5846 [UCS Settings]...
  • Page 997 System SP5xxx LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step] Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server. 020 WSD Maximum Entries 021 Folder Auth Change 0: Login User, 1: Destination 022 Initial Value of Upper Limit Count 500 Addr Book Migration (SD =>...
  • Page 998 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Clears the local address book information, including the 047 Initialize Local Addr Book user code. Clears the distribution address book information, 048 Initialize Delivery Addr Book except the user code. Clears the LDAP address book information, except the 049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book user code.
  • Page 999 System SP5xxx Complexity Option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password. [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step] •...
  • Page 1000 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x Network Quality Default for JPEG Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
  • Page 1001 System SP5xxx Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr. Print (Lower 4 bits) Access Ctrl: user Directory (only Lower 4 bits) Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax Switches access control on and off. (Lower 4 bits) 0000: No access control 009 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4 bits) 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
  • Page 1002 3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 5849 2 Switch to Print 0: OFF (No Print) 1: ON (Print) 003 Total Counter 5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL...

This manual is also suitable for:

D106

Table of Contents